2
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Contents
Accessories ························································································ 7
Inserting the batteries ······································································ 8
Operating range of the remote control unit ····································· 8
Features ······························································································ 9
High quality sound ············································································ 9
High performance ·········································································· 10
Easy operation ················································································ 11
Part names and functions
Front panel ······················································································ 12
With the door open ········································································ 14
Display ······························································································ 16
Rear panel ························································································ 18
Remote control unit ······································································ 21
Connections
Speaker connection ······································································ 25
Speaker installation ········································································ 25
Speaker connection ········································································ 28
Connecting a TV ············································································ 36
Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector
and compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) ·················· 37
Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector ··················· 38
Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector ············· 39
Contents
Connecting a playback device ··················································· 40
Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV) ······················· 41
Connecting a DVD player ······························································· 42
Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player compatible
with the Denon Link HD function ··················································· 43
Connecting a video camcorder or other device ······························ 44
Connecting a record player ···························································· 45
Connecting an iPod or USB memory device
to the USB port
·············································································· 46
Connecting an HDRadio receiver ············································· 48
Connecting to a home network (LAN) ···································· 50
Connecting an external control device ··································· 52
REMOTE CONTROL jacks ····························································· 52
TRIGGER OUT jacks ······································································· 52
Connecting the power cord ························································ 53
Playback
Basic operation ·············································································· 55
Turning the power on ····································································· 55
Selecting the input source ····························································· 55
Adjusting the master volume ························································· 56
Turning o the sound temporarily ·················································· 56
Playing a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player ······································· 56
3
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Contents
Playing an iPod ··············································································· 57
Listening to music on an iPod ························································ 58
Setting operation mode (iPod Browse Mode) ································ 59
Performing repeat playback (Repeat) ············································· 60
Performing random playback (Random) ········································· 60
Playing a USB memory device ·················································· 61
Playing files stored on USB memory devices ································ 62
Listening to HDRadio™ stations·············································· 64
Listening to HDRadio broadcasts ·················································· 65
Tuning in by entering the radio frequency (Direct Tune) ················ 67
Changing the tuning mode (Tune Mode) ······································· 67
Selecting audio programs ······························································· 68
Listening to preset stations ···························································· 68
Presetting the current broadcast station (Preset Memory) ············ 69
Tuning in to radio stations and presetting them automatically
(Auto Preset Memory) ···································································· 70
Specify a name for the preset broadcast station (Preset Name) ··· 70
Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip) ··························· 71
Cancelling preset skip ···································································· 71
Check the HDRadio reception information ···································· 72
Listening to Internet Radio ························································· 73
Listening to Internet Radio ····························································· 74
Playing the last played Internet Radio station ································ 75
Using vTuner to add Internet Radio stations to favorites ··············· 76
Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS···························· 77
Applying media sharing settings ···················································· 78
Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS ···································· 79
Viewing photographs on the Flickr site ································· 81
Viewing photographs shared by particular users ··························· 82
Viewing all photographs on Flickr ··················································· 84
Listening to Pandora
®
································································· 85
Listening to Pandora
®
····································································· 86
Creating a new station ··································································· 87
Listening to an existing station ······················································ 89
Listening to created radio stations at random ································ 89
Giving Feedback and Managing Stations ······································· 90
Sign Out ························································································· 91
Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio ······································ 92
Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio ············································· 92
Sign Out ························································································· 94
Listening to Spotify ······································································ 95
Listening to Spotify ········································································ 95
Adding to the FAVORITE STATION button ··························· 99
Playing back content added
to the FAVORITE STATION button ·············································· 100
4
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Contents
AirPlay function ··········································································· 101
Streaming music stored in iPhone, iPod touch,
or iPad directly to the unit ···························································· 101
Playing iTunes music with this unit ·············································· 102
Selecting multiple speakers (devices) ·········································· 102
Perform iTunes playback operations
with the remote control unit of this unit ······································ 103
Convenience functions ······························································ 104
Performing repeat playback (Repeat) ··········································· 105
Performing random playback (Random) ······································· 105
Add to favorites from the Option menu (Save to Favorites) ········ 106
Playing back content added in “Save to Favorites” ····················· 106
Deleting content added to favorites (Remove from Favorites) ···· 107
Searching content with keywords (Text Search) ·························· 107
Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time
(Slideshow) ··················································································· 108
Playing back still pictures in sequential order
(Slideshow Interval) ······································································ 109
Displaying your desired video during audio playback
(Video Select) ··············································································· 109
Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment
(Picture Mode) ·············································································· 110
Playing music in All Zone Stereo ·················································· 111
Selecting a sound mode ···························································· 112
Selecting a sound mode ······························································· 113
Direct playback ············································································· 114
Pure Direct playback ···································································· 114
HDMI control function ································································ 125
Setting procedure ········································································· 125
InstaPrevue function ·································································· 126
Switching input sources ······························································· 127
Setting how to display sub screens ············································· 127
Changing the display location of sub screens ······························ 127
Sleep timer function ··································································· 128
Using the sleep timer ··································································· 128
Quick select function ·································································· 129
Calling up the Quick Select ·························································· 129
Changing the settings ·································································· 129
Rec out function ··········································································· 130
Recording on an External Device ················································· 131
Web control function ·································································· 132
Controlling the unit from a web control ······································· 132
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room) ······················ 134
Connecting ZONE ········································································ 134
Playback in ZONE ········································································· 138
Settings
Menu map ······················································································ 140
Menu operation ············································································ 147
Inputting characters ··································································· 148
Using the keyboard screen ·························································· 149
Using the number buttons ··························································· 149
5
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Contents
Audio ······························································································· 150
Dialog Level ·················································································· 150
Subwoofer Level ·········································································· 150
Surround Parameter ····································································· 151
Tone ····························································································· 154
Restorer ······················································································· 155
Audio Delay ·················································································· 155
Volume ························································································· 155
Audyssey ······················································································ 156
Graphic EQ ··················································································· 160
Video ······························································································· 161
Picture Adjust ··············································································· 161
HDMI Setup ················································································· 162
Component Video Out ································································· 164
Output Settings ············································································ 165
On Screen Display ········································································ 167
TV Format ····················································································· 167
Inputs ······························································································ 168
Input Assign ················································································· 168
Source Rename ············································································ 170
Hide Sources ················································································ 170
Source Level ················································································ 170
Input Select ·················································································· 171
Speakers························································································· 172
Audyssey
®
Setup ········································································ 172
Procedure for speaker settings (Audyssey
®
Setup) ······················ 174
Error messages ············································································ 179
Retrieving Audyssey
®
Setup settings ··········································· 180
Manual Setup ··············································································· 181
Amp Assign ·················································································· 181
Speaker Config. ············································································ 182
Distances ····················································································· 184
Levels ··························································································· 185
Crossovers ··················································································· 185
Bass ····························································································· 186
Front Speaker Setup ···································································· 187
2ch Playback ················································································ 187
Network ························································································· 189
Information ··················································································· 189
IP Control ····················································································· 189
Friendly Name ·············································································· 189
Settings ························································································ 190
Diagnostics ··················································································· 191
Maintenance Mode ······································································ 192
6
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Contents
General ··························································································· 193
Language ······················································································ 193
ZONE2 Setup / ZONE3 Setup ······················································ 193
Zone Rename ··············································································· 195
Quick Select Names ····································································· 195
Trigger Out 1 / Trigger Out 2 ························································ 195
Auto Standby ················································································ 196
Front Display ················································································ 196
Information ··················································································· 197
Usage Data ··················································································· 198
Firmware ······················································································ 199
Setup Lock ··················································································· 201
Operating external devices
with the remote control unit
··················································· 202
Registering preset codes ····························································· 203
Operating devices ········································································ 205
Initializing registered preset codes ··············································· 208
Specifying the zone used with the remote control unit ··············· 208
Resetting the remote control unit ················································ 208
Tips
Contents ························································································· 209
Tips ······························································································· 210
Troubleshooting ··········································································· 212
Resetting factory settings ························································· 225
Appendix
About HDMI ···················································································· 226
Video conversion function ···························································· 229
Playing back USB memory devices ············································ 231
Playing back files stored on PC or NAS ····································· 232
Playing back Internet Radio ························································· 233
Personal memory plus function ·················································· 233
Last function memory ··································································· 233
Sound modes and channel output ·············································· 234
Sound modes and surround parameters ··································· 235
Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes ······ 238
Explanation of terms ····································································· 241
Trademark information ·································································· 248
Specifications ················································································· 250
Index ································································································ 253
License ···························································································· 256
List of preset codes······································································· 263
AVR ······························································································ 263
CBL/SAT group ············································································ 263
TV group ······················································································· 267
VCR/PVR group ··········································································· 270
BD/DVD group ·············································································· 271
Audio group ·················································································· 273
7
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Accessories
Check that the following parts are supplied with the product.
q Getting Started w CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual) e Safety Instructions r Warranty
(for North America model only)
t Power cord y Remote control unit (RC-1185) u R6/AA batteries i AM loop antenna
o FM indoor antenna Q0 Setup and measurement
microphone (ACM1HB)
Q1 Cable label
Thank you for purchasing this Denon product. To ensure proper operation, please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the product.
After reading this manual, be sure to keep it for future reference.
8
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Operating range of the remote control
unit
Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor when operating it.
30°30°
Approx. 23 ft/7 m
Inserting the batteries
q Slide the rear cover o the remote control
unit in the arrow direction.
w Load the two batteries properly as
indicated by the q and w marks in the
battery compartment.
R6/AA
e Put the rear cover back on.
NOTE
•When inserting the batteries, be sure to do so in the proper direction, following the
q and w marks in the battery compartment.
•To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid:
•Do not use a new battery together with an old one.
•Do not use two dierent types of batteries.
•Remove the batteries from the remote control unit if it will not be in use for long
periods.
•If the battery fluid should leak, carefully wipe the fluid o the inside of the battery
compartment and insert new batteries.
9
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
High quality sound
•With discrete circuit technology, the power amplifier provides
identical quality for all 7-channels (165 Watts x 7-channels)
For optimum realism and stunning dynamic range, the power amplifier
section features discrete power devices (not integrated circuitry).
By using high current, high power discrete power devices, the amplifier
is able to easily drive high quality speakers.
•Audyssey DSX
®
(vpage159)
This unit is equipped with Audyssey DSX® processor. By connecting
front height speakers to this unit and playing back with Audyssey
DSX® processing you can experience a more vertically expansive front
soundstage. By connecting two front wide speakers, you can experience
a wider and more expanded front soundstage.
•Audyssey LFC™ (Low Frequency Containment) (vpage158)
Audyssey LFC™ solves the problem of low frequency sounds disturbing
people in neighboring rooms or apartments. Audyssey LFC™ dynamically
monitors the audio content and removes the low frequencies that
pass through walls, floors and ceilings. It then applies psychoacoustic
processing to restore the perception of low bass for listeners in the
room. The result is great sound that no longer disturbs the neighbors.
•Discrete subwoofers and Audyssey Sub EQ HT™ (vpage173)
The unit has two subwoofer output capability and can adjust the level
and delay for each subwoofer individually.
Audyssey Sub EQ HT™ makes the integration seamless by first
compensating for any level and delay dierences between the two
subwoofers and then applying Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 to both
subwoofers together for improved deep bass response and detail.
•DTS Neo:X (vpage112)
This technology enables the playback of 2-channel source audio or
7.1/5.1 multi-channel source audio through a maximum 9.1-channel
speakers, achieving an even broader soundstage.
•Denon’s unique high quality playback technology “Denon Link HD”
(vpage43)
This unit is equipped with our exclusive Denon Link HD technology.When
connected to a Denon disc player that has Denon Link HD, the sound
localization becomes more precise, with increased detail and definition.
The system works by carrying the critical clock timing signals via the
dedicated Denon Link HD connection, minimizing the jitter caused by
conventional digital connections.
Features
10
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
•Equipped with Hybrid PLL Jitter Reducer capable of reducing jitter
and phase noise that negatively aects sound quality
Denon’s Hybrid Phase Lock Loop Jitter Reducer improves sound
localization, reproducing a broad and natural soundstage.
High performance
•Digital video processor upscales analog video signals (SD resolution)
to HD (720p/1080p) and 4K (vpage226)
This unit features a sophisticated video processor that can upscale
standard definition (SD) analog video content from legacy sources such
as a VCR to HD and is able to output at 4K Ultra HD resolution (3840 x
2160 pixels) for compatibility with newly available high resolution 4K TVs.
•Equipped with HDMI ZONE2 output (vpage134)
The ZONE2 multi-room output includes an HDMI output that lets you
enjoy a dierent A/V source in that room, with another program playing
in the main room.
•Simultaneous playback via two HDMI outputs (for MAIN ZONE)
(vpage134)
This unit is equipped with two HDMI MONITOR outputs. You can
connect one output to a projector and the other output to a TV for
simultaneous signal outputs.
•Supports Internet Radio, music, and photograph streaming
Supports AirPlay
®
(vpage101)
You can enjoy a wide variety of content, including listening to Internet
Radio, playing audio files stored on your PC, and displaying photographs
stored on your PC on our television.
This unit also supports Apple AirPlay which lets you stream your music
library from an iPhone®, iPad®, iPod touch® or iTunes®.
•Compatible with “Denon Remote App” for performing basic
operations of the unit with an iPad, iPhone
z
or Android smartphone
“Denon Remote App” is application software that allows you to perform
basic operations with an iPad, iPhone, Android smartphone or Android
tablet such as turning the unit ON/OFF, controlling the volume, and
switching the source.
z Download the appropriate “Denon Remote App” for iOS and Android
devices. This unit needs to be connected to your LAN and the iPhone/
iPod touch or other device needs to be connected to the same
network by Wi-Fi (wireless LAN).
•HDMI connections enable quick connection to various digital AV
devices (7 inputs, 3 outputs)
The unit is equipped with 7 HDMI input connectors for connecting
devices with HDMI connectors, such as a Blu-ray Disc player, game
console, HD digital camcorder, HDTVs, etc.
11
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
•Supports HDMI (3D, ARC, Deep Color, “x.v.Color”, Auto Lip Sync,
4K) and HDMI control function (vpage226)
Advanced HDMI features are supported, including 3D passthrough,
Audio Return Channel, Auto Lip Sync, Deep Color and “x.v.Color”, and
HDMI CEC control functions. If a 4K digital video signal is input, it is
passed through the unit unchanged, and the GUI overlay will adjust the
resolution accordingly.
•Direct play for iPod and iPhone via USB (vpage46)
Music data from an iPod or iPhone can be played back if you connect
the USB cable supplied with the iPod via the USB port of this unit, and
also an iPod can be controlled with the remote control that comes with
this unit.
•Equipped with 3 source 3 zone Multi-Zone Function
Lets you enjoy audio and video in the main room, and have up to
1 other zones with dierent audio content delivered to each room
(vpage134).
•Multi-Room audio
Enjoy the same music in your home theater and another room at the
same time (vpage111).
•InstaPrevue Technology (vpage126)
Live picture-in-picture preview of HDMI sources that are connected to
the unit.
Easy operation
•“Setup Assistant” provides easy-to-follow setup instructions
First select the language when prompted. Then simply follow the
instructions displayed on the TV screen to set up the speakers, network,
etc.
•Easy to use Graphical User Interface
This unit is equipped with an easy to see Graphical User Interface that
uses menu displays and features colorful icons and easy to understand
controls for maximum ease of use.
13
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
q Power operation button (X)
This turns the power of MAIN ZONE on/o (standby) (vpage55).
w Power indicator
This is lit as follows according to the power status:
•Power on : Green
•Normal standby : O
•When “HDMI Pass Through” (vpage 163) or “HDMI Control”
(vpage163) is set to “On” : Red
•When “IP Control” (vpage189) is set to “Always On” : Red
e Door
When you are using buttons and/or connectors behind the door,
press the bottom of the door to open it. When not using buttons and/
or connectors behind the door, close it. Be careful not to catch your
fingers when closing the door.
r MASTER VOLUME knob
This adjusts the volume level (vpage56).
t Display
This displays various pieces of information (vpage16).
y Remote control sensor
This receives signals from the remote control unit (vpage8).
u SOURCE SELECT knob
This selects the input source (vpage55).
q w
tyu r
e
14
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
With the door open
u iw te r y
q
Q1 Q0
Q2 o
q AUX1 HDMI 7 connector
Used to connect HDMI output compatible devices such as video
cameras and game consoles (vpage44).
w USB port
Used to connect USB storages (such as USB memory devices) and the
USB cable supplied with iPod (vpage46).
e Headphones jack (PHONES)
When the headphones are plugged into this jack, audio will no longer
be output from the connected speakers.
NOTE
•To prevent hearing loss, do not raise the volume level excessively when using
headphones.
r BACK button
This returns to the previous screen (vpage147).
t ENTER button
This determines the selection (vpage147).
y SETUP button
This displays the menu on the TV screen (vpage147).
u AUX1 INPUT connector
Used to connect analog output compatible devices such as video
cameras and game consoles (vpage44)
i SETUP MIC jack
Used to connect the supplied Setup and measurement microphone
(vpage175).
o QUICK SELECT buttons
With a single press of any of these buttons, you can call up various
settings you’ve registered to each button such as the input source,
volume level and sound mode settings (vpage129).
Q0 DIMMER button
Each press of this switches the brightness of the display (vpage196).
Q1 OPTION button
This displays the option menu on the TV screen (vpage104).
Q2 Cursor buttons (uio p)
These select items (vpage147).
15
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Q4Q5Q6Q8 Q3
Q7
Q3 Information button (INFO)
This displays the status information on the TV screen (vpage198).
Q4 STATUS button
Each press of this switches the status information that is shown on the
display (vpage59).
Q5 ZONE3 SOURCE button
This selects the input source for ZONE3 (vpage138).
Q6 ZONE3 ON/OFF button
This turns the power of ZONE3 on/o (vpage138).
Q7 ZONE2 SOURCE button
This selects the input source for ZONE2 (vpage138).
Q8 ZONE2 ON/OFF button
This turns the power of ZONE2 on/o (vpage138).
16
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Display
q w e
ty rui
oQ0Q1Q2
q Information display
The input source name, sound mode, setting values and other
information are displayed here.
w Front speaker indicator
This lights according to the setting of the front A and B speakers.
e Input/output signal channel indicators
The channel for input/output signals is displayed according to the
setting configured for “Channel Indicators” (vpage196).
•When “Channel Indicators” is set to “Output” (Default)
These light when audio signals are being output from the speakers.
•When “Channel Indicators” is set to “Input”
These light when digital signals are input.
When playing HD Audio sources, the indicator lights when a
signal from an extension channel (a channel other than the front,
center, surround, surround back, front height, front wide or LFE
channel) is input.
r Master volume indicator
t MUTE indicator
This lights when the audio mute mode is selected (vpage56).
y Sleep timer indicator
This lights when the sleep mode is selected (vpage128).
u MULTI ZONE indicator
This lights up when ZONE2 or ZONE3 (separate room) power is turned
on (vpage138).
i Monitor output indicator
These light according to the HDMI monitor output setting.
When set to “Auto(Dual)”, the indicators light according to connection
status (vpage163).
17
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Q0 oQ1Q2
o Tuner reception mode indicators
These light according to the reception conditions when the input
source is set to “HD Radio”.
STEREO : In FM mode, this lights up when receiving stereo broadcasts.
TUNED : Lights up when the broadcast is properly tuned in.
Q0 Audyssey
®
indicator
This indicator lights when the “MultEQ® XT32” (vpage 156),
“Dynamic EQ” (vpage 157) or “Dynamic Volume” (vpage 158)
setting is set to other than “O” and “Audyssey LFC™ (vpage158)
setting or “Audyssey DSX®” (vpage159) is set to other than “O”.
Q1 Decoder indicator
These light when Dolby or DTS signals are input or when the Dolby or
DTS decoder is running.
Q2 Input signal indicators
The respective indicator will light corresponding to the input signal
(vpage171).
18
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Rear panel
SIGNAL
GND
AC IN
AM
LOOP
ANT.
COAX.
75Ω
FM
CBL/
SAT
MEDIA
PLAYER
MEDIA
PLAYER
MEDIA
PLAYER
ZONE2
1 CBL
/
SAT
2 DVD
Y
P
B
/
CB
DVD
2
1
3
MONITOR
/
ZONE2
PR
/
CR
PB
/
CB
Y
PR
/
CR
ZONE2 ZONE3 FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
Denon Link HD
CBL
/
SAT
AUDIO
TV
CD
DVD
COAXIAL OPTICAL
1
1
2
2
DIGITAL AUDIO
IN
DC12V
150mA
MAX.
STRAIGHT CABLE
1
2
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
IR
IN OUT
TRIGGER OUT
ARC
1 CBL/SAT
2 DVD
3 Blu-ray
6 AUX24 GAME
5 MEDIA PLAYER
ZONE2
MONITOR1
MONITOR2
PHONO
3 Blu-ray
4 MEDIA PLAYER
1 CBL
/
SAT
2 DVD 5 CD
ANTENNA
NETWORK
MONITOR
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO VIDEO
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
HDMI
IN
HDMI
OUT
SURROUND BACK
SUBWOOFER
1 2
OUT
OUT
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN
IN
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
OUT
AUDIO
PRE OUT
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND BACK
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 6～16
Ω
CLASS 2 WIRING
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT WIDE
FRONT WIDE
q w e
y rtQ4 Q0 uo iQ1Q3Q2Q5
19
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
SIGNAL
GND
AC IN
AM
LOOP
ANT.
COAX.
75Ω
FM
CBL/
SAT
MEDIA
PLAYER
MEDIA
PLAYER
MEDIA
PLAYER
ZONE2
1 CBL
/
SAT
2 DVD
Y
P
B
/
CB
DVD
2
1
3
MONITOR
/
ZONE2
PR
/
CR
PB
/
CB
Y
P
R
/
CR
ZONE2 ZONE3 FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
Denon Link HD
CBL
/
SAT
AUDIO
TV
CD
DVD
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
1
1
2
2
DIGITAL AUDIO
IN
DC12V
150mA
MAX.
STRAIGHT CABLE
1
2
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
IR
IN OUT
TRIGGER OUT
ARC
1 CBL/SAT
2 DVD
3 Blu-ray
6 AUX24 GAME
5 MEDIA PLAYER
ZONE2
MONITOR1
MONITOR2
PHONO
3 Blu-ray
4 MEDIA PLAYER
1 CBL
/
SAT
2 DVD 5 CD
ANTENNA
NETWORK
MONITOR
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO VIDEO
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
HDMI
IN
HDMI
OUT
SURROUND BACK
SUBWOOFER
1 2
OUT
OUT
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN
IN
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
OUT
AUDIO
PRE OUT
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT WIDE
FRONT WIDE
y rtQ0 uoiQ1Q2
q w e
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND BACK
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 6～16
Ω
CLASS 2 WIRING
ASSIGNABLE
q FM/AM antenna terminals (ANTENNA)
Used to connect FM and AM antennas (vpage64).
w Speaker terminals (SPEAKERS)
Used to connect speakers (vpage28).
e PRE OUT connectors
Used to connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier or an external
power amplifier (vpage29, 138).
r AC inlet (AC IN)
Used to connect the power cord (vpage53).
t Component video connectors (COMPONENT VIDEO)
Used to connect devices equipped with component video connectors
(vpage41, 42).
y HDMI connectors
Used to connect devices equipped with HDMI connectors
(vpage37, 38, 44).
u Video connectors (VIDEO)
Used to connect devices equipped with video connectors
(vpage41, 42).
i SIGNAL GND jacks
Used to connect a record player (vpage45).
o Denon Link HD connector
Used to connect a Denon Link HD compatible Blu-ray Disc player
(vpage43).
Q0 REMOTE CONTROL jacks
Used to connect infrared receivers/transmitters in order to operate this
unit and external devices from a dierent room (vpage52).
Q1 Digital audio connectors (DIGITAL AUDIO)
Used to connect devices equipped with digital audio connectors
(vpage41, 42).
Q2 RS-232C connector
The RS-232C serial port is provided to allow compatibility with an
external home automation controller. Consult the owner’s manual
of the home automation controller for more information about serial
control of this unit. The serial port allows two-way control and status
via an external home automation controller.
20
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
SIGNAL
GND
AC IN
AM
LOOP
ANT.
COAX.
75Ω
FM
CBL/
SAT
MEDIA
PLAYER
MEDIA
PLAYER
MEDIA
PLAYER
ZONE2
1 CBL
/
SAT
2 DVD
Y
P
B
/
CB
DVD
2
1
3
MONITOR
/
ZONE2
PR
/
CR
PB
/
CB
Y
P
R
/
CR
ZONE2 ZONE3 FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
Denon Link HD
CBL
/
SAT
AUDIO
TV
CD
DVD
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
1
1
2
2
DIGITAL AUDIO
IN
DC12V
150mA
MAX.
STRAIGHT CABLE
1
2
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
IR
IN OUT
TRIGGER OUT
ARC
1 CBL/SAT
2 DVD
3 Blu-ray
6 AUX24 GAME
5 MEDIA PLAYER
ZONE2
MONITOR1
MONITOR2
PHONO
3 Blu-ray
4 MEDIA PLAYER
1 CBL
/
SAT
2 DVD 5 CD
ANTENNA
NETWORK
MONITOR
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO VIDEO
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
HDMI
IN
HDMI
OUT
SURROUND BACK
SUBWOOFER
1 2
OUT
OUT
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN
IN
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
OUT
AUDIO
PRE OUT
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT WIDE
FRONT WIDE
Q4 Q3Q5
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND BACK
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 6～16
Ω
CLASS 2 WIRING
ASSIGNABLE
Q3 Network connector (NETWORK)
Used to connect this unit to the network (vpage50).
Q4 TRIGGER OUT jacks
Used to connect devices equipped with the trigger function
(vpage52).
Q5 Analog audio connectors (AUDIO)
Used to connect devices equipped with analog audio connectors
(vpage41, 42).
NOTE
•Do not touch the inner pins of the connectors on the rear panel. Electrostatic
discharge may cause permanent damage to the unit.
21
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Remote control unit
q ZONE SELECT buttons (MAIN, 2, 3)
These switch the zone (MAIN ZONE, ZONE2, ZONE3) that is operated
through the remote control unit (vpage138, 147).
w Operation mode indicators
The “AVR” indicator lights when the unit is being operated.
The “DEV.” indicator lights when an external device is being operated.
The “TV” indicator lights when the TV is being operated.
e Device operation buttons (DEVICE X / DEVICE MENU)
These turn the power of external devices on/o and call up menus.
Preset codes need to be registered in order to use these buttons
(vpage205).
r Input source select buttons
These select the input source (vpage55).
t FAVORITE STATION buttons (1 – 4)
With a single press of these, you can call up registered radio stations
and contents (vpage99).
y Channel/page search buttons (CH/PAGE df)
These select preset radio stations or switch pages (vpage68).
u MUTE button (:)
This mutes the output audio (vpage56).
i Information button (INFO)
This displays the status information on the TV screen (vpage198).
o Cursor buttons (uio p)
These select items (vpage147).
Q0 BACK button
This returns to the previous screen (vpage147).
InstaPrevue
TUNER
AVR
SOUND MODE
RC-1185
MUTE
POWERZONE SELECT
FAVORITE STATION
TUNE TUNE
PUREMOVIE GAME
MUSIC
GAME
CBL /
SAT
Blu-ray
DVD
AUX1
AUX2
NETWORK
INTERNET
RADIO
iPod/
USB
VOLUME
OPTIONINFO
BACK
SETUP
CH/ PAGE
MENU
ENTER
2 3
1
1 2 3 4
2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER0+10
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS TUV
ABC. /
DEF
SLEEP
WXYZ
MAIN
MEDIA
PLAYER
CD
INPUT
TVDEVICE
MENU
PHONO
DEV. TV AVR
TV
AUDIO
q
w
e
r
y
i
u
o
t
Q0
22
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Q1 System buttons
These perform playback related operations (vpage57).
•Skip buttons (8, 9)
•Play button (1)
•Search buttons (6, 7)
•Pause button (3)
•Stop button (2)
Tuning up / Tuning down buttons (TUNE +, –)
These operate the tuner (vpage65).
Q2 Number / Character buttons
These enter letters or numbers into the unit (vpage149).
Q3 Remote control signal transmitter
This transmits signals from the remote control unit (vpage8).
Q4 POWER button (X)
This turns the power on/o (vpage55).
Q5 TV operation buttons
(TV X / TV MENU / TV INPUT)
These turn the TV power on/o, switch the TV input and call up menus.
Preset codes need to be registered in order to use these buttons
(vpage206).
Q6 AVR-operation mode button
When using a remote control with preset codes registered, press AVR
before other operations in order to operate the unit.
Q7 InstaPrevue button
This displays the InstaPrevue screen (vpage126).
InstaPrevue
TUNER
AVR
SOUND MODE
RC-1185
MUTE
POWERZONE SELECT
FAVORITE STATION
TUNE TUNE
PUREMOVIE GAME
MUSIC
GAME
CBL /
SAT
Blu-ray
DVD
AUX1
AUX2
NETWORK
INTERNET
RADIO
iPod/
USB
VOLUME
OPTIONINFO
BACK
SETUP
CH/ PAGE
MENU
ENTER
2 3
1
1 2 3 4
2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER0+10
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS TUV
ABC. /
DEF
SLEEP
WXYZ
MAIN
MEDIA
PLAYER
CD
INPUT
TVDEVICE
MENU
PHONO
DEV. TV AVR
TV
AUDIO
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q3
Q1
Q2
23
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
InstaPrevue
TUNER
AVR
SOUND MODE
RC-1185
MUTE
POWERZONE SELECT
FAVORITE STATION
TUNE TUNE
PUREMOVIE GAME
MUSIC
GAME
CBL /
SAT
Blu-ray
DVD
AUX1
AUX2
NETWORK
INTERNET
RADIO
iPod/
USB
VOLUME
OPTIONINFO
BACK
SETUP
CH/ PAGE
MENU
ENTER
2 3
1
1 2 3 4
2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER0+10
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS TUV
ABC. /
DEF
SLEEP
WXYZ
MAIN
MEDIA
PLAYER
CD
INPUT
TVDEVICE
MENU
PHONO
DEV. TV AVR
TV
AUDIO
W1
W2
W3
W0
Q8
Q9
W0
q
Q8 VOLUME buttons (df)
These adjust the volume level (vpage56).
Q9 OPTION button
This displays the option menu on the TV screen (vpage104).
W0 ENTER button
This determines the selection (vpage147).
W1 SETUP button
This displays the menu on the TV screen (vpage147).
W2 SOUND MODE buttons
These select the sound mode (vpage112).
•MOVIE button
•MUSIC button
•GAME button
•PURE button
W3 SLEEP button
This sets the sleep timer (vpage128).
24
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlayback
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Connections
Connections
Speaker connection (vpage25)
Connecting a TV (vpage36)
Connecting a playback device (vpage40)
Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB
port (vpage46)
Connecting an HDRadio receiver (vpage48)
Connecting to a home network (LAN) (vpage50)
Connecting an external control device (vpage52)
Connecting the power cord (vpage53)
NOTE
•Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been completed.
However, when the “Setup Assistant” is running, follow the instructions in the
“Setup Assistant” (C page 7) screen for making connections. (During “Setup
Assistant” operation, the input/output connectors do not conduct current.)
•Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing so can result
in noise.
2 Cables used for connections
Provide necessary cables according to the devices you want to connect.
Speaker cable
Subwoofer cable
HDMI cable
Component video cable
Video cable
Coaxial digital cable
Optical cable
Audio cable
R
L
R
L
LAN cable
25
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlayback
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Connections
Speaker connection
Install speakers and connect them to this unit (vpage25, 28).
Speaker installation
Determine the speaker system depending on the number of speakers you
are using and install each speaker and subwoofer in the room. Here, we
explain how to install the speakers using a typical example.
FHL FHR
FL FR
FWL FWRSW1
C
SW2
SL SR
SBL SB SBR
FL/FR : Place the FRONT left and right speakers an equal distance from
the main listening position. The distance between each speaker
and your TV should also be the same.
C : Place the CENTER speaker in between the front speakers and above
or below your TV.
SL/SR : Place the SURROUND left and right speakers an equal distance
to the left and right sides of the main listening position. If you
don’t have Surround Back speakers, move the surround speakers
slightly behind your listening position.
SBL/SBR (SB) : Place the SURROUND BACK left and right speakers
an equal distance from the main listening position and
directly behind the main listening position. If you only
have one Surround Back speaker, center it.
FHL/FHR : Place the FRONT HEIGHT left and right speakers just outside
of the front left and right speakers. Mount them as close to the
ceiling as possible and aim them towards the main listening
position.
FWL/FWR : Place the FRONT WIDE left and right speakers outside of the
front left and right speakers so that there is an equal distance
between all front speakers.
SW : Place the SUBWOOFER at a convenient location near the front
speakers. If you have two subwoofers, place them symmetrically
across the front of your room.
26
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlayback
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Connections
%
•This unit is compatible with Audyssey DSX® (vpage 241), Dolby Pro Logic gz
(vpage 243) and DTS Neo:X (vpage 244) which oers an even wider and
deeper surround sensation.
When using Audyssey DSX®, install front wide speakers or front height speakers.
When using Dolby Pro Logic gz, install front height speakers.
•Use the illustration below as a guide for how high each speaker should be installed.
The height does not need to be exactly the same.
z1
z2
45˚
Surround
speaker
2 – 3 ft/
60 – 90 cm
GViewed from the sideH
Front height
speaker
•Point slightly
downwards
At least
3.3 ft/1 m
Surround back
speaker
•Point slightly
downwards
Front
speaker
Front wide
speaker
z1 Recommended for Dolby Pro Logic gz
z2 Recommended for Audyssey DSX®
NOTE
•You cannot have audio output from the surround back speakers, front height
speakers and front wide speakers simultaneously.
2 Typical speaker layout
FHRFHL
FL
FR
SL
SR
FWL
FWR
SW
C
SBL SBR
z1
z2
z3
z5
z4
Listening
position
z1 22˚ – 30˚
z2 22˚ – 45˚
z3 55˚ – 60˚
z4 90˚ – 110˚
z5 135˚ – 150˚
%
•When using a single surround back speaker, place it directly behind the listening
position.
GSpeaker abbreviationsH
FL Front speaker (L) SBL Surround back speaker (L)
FR Front speaker (R) SBR Surround back speaker (R)
C Center speaker FHL Front height speaker (L)
SW Subwoofer FHR Front height speaker (R)
SL Surround speaker (L) FWL Front wide speaker (L)
SR Surround speaker (R) FWR Front wide speaker (R)
28
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlayback
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Connections
Speaker connection
Here we connect the speakers in the room to this unit.
This section explains how to connect them using typical examples.
NOTE
•Disconnect this unit’s power plug from the power outlet before connecting the
speakers. Also, turn o the subwoofer.
•Connect so that the speaker cable core wires do not protrude from the speaker
terminal. The protection circuit may be activated if the core wires touch the rear
panel or if the + and – sides touch each other (vpage246 “Protection circuit”).
•Never touch the speaker terminals while the power cord is connected. Doing so
could result in electric shock. When the “Setup Assistant” is running, follow the
instructions in the “Setup Assistant” screen for making connections. (Power is not
supplied to the speaker terminals while the “Setup Assistant” is running.)
•Use speakers with an impedance of 6 – 16 Ω/ohms.
2 Connecting the speaker cables
Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and + (red) and –
(black) polarities on the speakers being connected to this unit, and be
sure to connect the channels and polarities correctly.
1
Peel o about 3/8 inch (10 mm) of
sheathing from the tip of the speaker
cable, then either twist the core wire
tightly or terminate it.
2
Turn the speaker terminal counterclockwise
to loosen it.
3
Insert the speaker cable’s core wire to the
hilt into the speaker terminal.
4
Turn the speaker terminal clockwise to
tighten it.
29
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlayback
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Connections
2 Connecting the subwoofer
Use a subwoofer cable to connect the subwoofer.
Two subwoofers can be connected to this unit.
To use two subwoofers, set “Subwoofer” to “2 spkrs” using the
“Speaker Config.” (vpage183) setting.
The level and distance can be set separately for Subwoofer 1 and
Subwoofer 2.
FRONT HEIGHT
SURROUND
SURROUND
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND BACK
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 6～16
Ω
ASSIGNABLE
ZONE2 ZONE3 FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
SUBWOOFER
1 2
PRE OUT
FRONT WIDE
SW1 SW2
30
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlayback
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Connections
2 About the speaker cable label (supplied) for
channel identification
The channel display section for speaker terminals on the rear panel is
color-coded for each channel to be identifiable.
Speaker terminals Color
FRONT L White
FRONT R Red
CENTER Green
SURROUND L Light blue
SURROUND R Blue
SURROUND BACK L Beige
SURROUND BACK R Brown
FRONT HEIGHT L Light purple
FRONT HEIGHT R Purple
FRONT WIDE L Light yellow
FRONT WIDE R Yellow
Attach the speaker cable label for each channel to its speaker cable as
shown in the diagram.
Then, make connection so that the color of the speaker terminal
matches that of the speaker cable label.
GHow to attach the speaker cable labelH
Speaker This unit
31
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlayback
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Connections
2 Connecting 11.1-channel speakers
The illustrations shows a connection example for performing 11.1-channel playback using surround back speakers.
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND BACK
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 6～16
Ω
CLASS 2 WIRING
ASSIGNABLE
ZONE2 ZONE3 FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
SUBWOOFER
1 2
PRE OUT
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT WIDE
FRONT WIDE
SW1
FLFR C SR SL SBR SBL FHR FHL FWR FWL
%
•When using this connection, also set “Assign Mode” in the menu to “7.1ch (SB/FH/FW)” and “9.1ch (SB/FH/FW)” (vpage181).
•When “Assign Mode” in the menu is set to “9.1ch(SB/FH/FW)”, use an external amp to connect the pre-out terminal to the channel specified in “Main Pre-amps”
(vpage182).
•When using a signal surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L terminal.
32
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlayback
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Connections
2 About the front B speaker connections
•For how to connect the front, center, and surround speaker and the subwoofer to this unit, see “Connecting 11.1-channel speakers” (vpage31).
FR (B) FL (B)
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND BACK
IMPEDANCE : 6～16
Ω
ASSIGNABLE
%
•When using this connection, also set “Assign Mode” in the menu to “5.1ch + Front B” (vpage181).
33
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlayback
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Connections
2 About the Bi-amp connection
Some audiophile loudspeakers can be connected to an amplifier with two separate amp-to-speaker connections per each speaker. One amplifier
channel’s output is hooked up to the speaker’s bass driver (woofer), while the other amplifier drives the upper range transducers (tweeter, or in
some cases midrange and tweeter). This connection method has one amplifier channel driving one half of the bi-amp speaker, and avoids electrical
interference between the speaker’s bass and treble drivers and the driving amplifier channels. You can assign 4 amp channels to connect to one pair
of bi-amp capable speakers. Bi-amp capable speakers always have two sets of speaker input connector pairs, one for the bass range and one for
the treble range. If you’re unsure about whether or not your speakers are bi-amp capable, consult the owner’s manual that came with the speakers.
•For how to connect the center, and surround speaker and the subwoofer to this unit, see “Connecting 11.1-channel speakers” (vpage31).
wq wq
(R) (L)
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND BACK
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 6～16
Ω
CLASS 2 WIRING
ASSIGNABLE
ZONE2 ZONE3 FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
SUBWOOFER
1 2
PRE OUT
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT WIDE
FRONT WIDE
FLFR
SW1
%
•When using this connection, also set “Assign Mode” in the
menu to “5.1ch (Bi-Amp)” (vpage181).
NOTE
•When making bi-amp connections, be sure to remove the
short-circuiting plate or wire between the speaker’s woofer
and tweeter terminals.
34
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlayback
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Connections
2 About connecting front speakers exclusively for 2-channel playback
You can connect the other from speaker for 2-channel playback using the DIRECT mode or STEREO mode.
The speakers used exclusively fro multi-channel playback and the speaker used exclusively for 2-channel playback are automatically switched for
playback in accordance with the sound mode.
•For how to connect the front, center, and surround speaker and the subwoofer to this unit, see “Connecting 11.1-channel speakers” (vpage31).
Multi-channel playback
(Sound mode)
2-channel playback
(DIRECT/STEREO mode)
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND BACK
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 6～16
Ω
CLASS 2 WIRING
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT WIDE
FRONT WIDE
FR’ FL’
Switching
%
•When using this connection, also set “Assign Mode” in the menu to “7.1ch/2ch Front” (vpage181).
35
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlayback
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Connections
2 Connecting an external power amplifier
•You can use this unit as a pre-amp by connecting an external power amplifier to the PRE OUT connectors. Adding an external power amplifier with
a higher power output rating than this unit may be beneficial with loudspeakers that have lower eciency and/or lower impedances, or to reach
higher volume levels.
•Select the terminal to use and connect the device.
SIGNAL
GND
AC IN
AM
LOOP
ANT.
COAX.
75Ω
FM
CBL/
SAT
MEDIA
PLAYER
MEDIA
PLAYER
MEDIA
PLAYER
ZONE2
1 CBL
/
SAT
2 DVD
Y
P
B
/
CB
DVD
2
1
3
MONITOR
/
ZONE2
PR
/
CR
PB
/
CB
Y
P
R
/
CR
Denon Link HD
CBL
/
SAT
AUDIO
TV
CD
DVD
COAXIAL OPTICAL
1
1
2
2
DIGITAL AUDIO
IN
DC12V
150mA
MAX.
STRAIGHT CABLE
1
2
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
IR
IN OUT
TRIGGER OUT
ARC
1 CBL/SAT
2 DVD
3 Blu-ray
6 AUX24 GAME
5 MEDIA PLAYER
ZONE2
MONITOR1
MONITOR2
PHONO
3 Blu-ray
4 MEDIA PLAYER
1 CBL
/
SAT
2 DVD 5 CD
ANTENNA
NETWORK
MONITOR
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO VIDEO
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
HDMI
IN
HDMI
OUT
OUT
OUT
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN
IN
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
OUT
AUDIO
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT WIDE
FRONT WIDE
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND BACK
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 6～16
Ω
CLASS 2 WIRING
ASSIGNABLE
ZONE2 ZONE3 FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
SUBWOOFER
1 2
PRE OUT
L
L
L
L
L
L
R R R
RR R
L
L
L
L
R R
R R
CENTER SURROUND
BACK
RL
SURROUND
RL
FRONT
RL
AUDIO
SUB-
WOOFER
2
AUDIO
SUB-
WOOFER
1
AUDIO
FRONT
WIDE
RL
FRONT
HEIGHT
RL
Subwoofer
(Primary)
Power amplifier
Subwoofer
(Secondary)
%
•When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the
left channel (L) terminal.
36
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlayback
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Connections
Connecting a TV
Connect a TV to this unit so that the input video is output to the TV. You can also enjoy audio from the TV on this unit.
How to connect a TV depends on the connectors and functions equipped on the TV.
ARC function plays TV audio on this unit by sending the TV audio signal to this unit via HDMI cable.
Yes
No
Yes
Connection 1
(vpage37)
Connection 2
(vpage38)
Connection 3
(vpage39)
Is the TV equipped with an HDMI connector?
Is the TV compatible with the ARC (Audio
Return Channel) ?
No
37
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlayback
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Connections
Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC
(Audio Return Channel)
Use an HDMI cable to connect a TV that is compatible with the ARC function to this unit.
Set “HDMI Control” (vpage163) to “On” when using a TV that supports the ARC function.
SIGNAL
GND
AC IN
AM
LOOP
ANT.
COAX.
75Ω
FM
CBL/
SAT
MEDIA
PLAYER
MEDIA
PLAYER
MEDIA
PLAYER
ZONE2
1 CBL
/
SAT
2 DVD
Y
P
B
/
CB
DVD
2
1
3
MONITOR
/
ZONE2
PR
/
CR
PB
/
CB
Y
P
R
/
CR
ZONE2 ZONE3 FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
Denon Link HD
CBL
/
SAT
AUDIO
TV
CD
DVD
COAXIAL OPTICAL
1
1
2
2
DIGITAL AUDIO
IN
DC12V
150mA
MAX.
STRAIGHT CABLE
1
2
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
IR
IN OUT
TRIGGER OUT
1 CBL/SAT
2 DVD
3 Blu-ray
6 AUX24 GAME
5 MEDIA PLAYER
PHONO
3 Blu-ray
4 MEDIA PLAYER
1 CBL
/
SAT
2 DVD 5 CD
ANTENNA
NETWORK
MONITOR
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO VIDEO
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
HDMI
IN
SURROUND BACK
SUBWOOFER
1 2
OUT
OUT
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN
IN
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
OUT
AUDIO
PRE OUT
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND BACK
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 6～16
Ω
CLASS 2 WIRING
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT WIDE
FRONT WIDE
ARC
ZONE2
MONITOR1
MONITOR2
HDMI
OUT
(ARC)
IN
HDMI
TV
38
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlayback
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Connections
Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector
Use an HDMI cable to connect the TV to this unit.
To listen to audio from TV on this unit, use an optical cable to connect the TV to this unit.
SIGNAL
GND
AC IN
AM
LOOP
ANT.
COAX.
75Ω
FM
CBL/
SAT
MEDIA
PLAYER
MEDIA
PLAYER
MEDIA
PLAYER
ZONE2
1 CBL
/
SAT
2 DVD
Y
P
B
/
CB
DVD
2
1
3
MONITOR
/
ZONE2
PR
/
CR
PB
/
CB
Y
P
R
/
CR
ZONE2 ZONE3 FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
Denon Link HD
DC12V
150mA
MAX.
STRAIGHT CABLE
1
2
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
IR
IN OUT
TRIGGER OUT
1 CBL/SAT
2 DVD
3 Blu-ray
6 AUX24 GAME
5 MEDIA PLAYER
PHONO
3 Blu-ray
4 MEDIA PLAYER
1 CBL
/
SAT
2 DVD 5 CD
ANTENNA
NETWORK
MONITOR
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO VIDEO
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
HDMI
IN
SURROUND BACK
SUBWOOFER
1 2
OUT
OUT
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN
IN
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
OUT
AUDIO
PRE OUT
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND BACK
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 6～16
Ω
CLASS 2 WIRING
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT WIDE
FRONT WIDE
CBL
/
SAT
AUDIO
TV
CD
DVD
COAXIAL OPTICAL
1
1
2
2
DIGITAL AUDIO
IN
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
ARC
ZONE2
MONITOR1
MONITOR2
HDMI
OUT
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT IN
IN
HDMI
TV
%
•To output audio signals that are input from the HDMI input connector
to a TV connected via HDMI, set “HDMI Audio Out” (vpage162)
to “TV”.
39
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlayback
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Connections
Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector
Use a video or a component cable to connect the TV to this unit.
To listen to audio from TV on this unit, use an optical cable to connect the TV to this unit.
ARC
ZONE2
MONITOR1
MONITOR2
HDMI
OUT
SIGNAL
GND
AC IN
AM
LOOP
ANT.
COAX.
75Ω
FM
CBL/
SAT
MEDIA
PLAYER
MEDIA
PLAYER
1 CBL
/
SAT
2 DVD
Y
P
B
/
CB
DVD
2
1
3
PR
/
CR
ZONE2 ZONE3 FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
Denon Link HD
DC12V
150mA
MAX.
STRAIGHT CABLE
1
2
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
IR
IN OUT
TRIGGER OUT
1 CBL/SAT
2 DVD
3 Blu-ray
6 AUX24 GAME
5 MEDIA PLAYER
PHONO
3 Blu-ray
4 MEDIA PLAYER
1 CBL
/
SAT
2 DVD 5 CD
ANTENNA
NETWORK
IN
VIDEO
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
HDMI
IN
SURROUND BACK
SUBWOOFER
1 2
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN
IN
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
OUT
AUDIO
PRE OUT
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND BACK
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 6～16
Ω
CLASS 2 WIRING
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT WIDE
FRONT WIDE
MEDIA
PLAYER
ZONE2
CBL
/
SAT
AUDIO
TV
CD
DVD
COAXIAL OPTICAL
1
1
2
2
DIGITAL AUDIO
IN
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
MONITOR
VIDEO
OUT
MONITOR
/
ZONE2
PR
/
CR
PB
/
CB
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO
OUT
OUT
OPTICAL
IN
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y P
B PR
IN
OUT IN
or
TV
40
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlayback
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Connections
Connecting a playback device
This unit is equipped with three types of video input connectors (HDMI, component video and composite video) and three type of video output connectors
(HDMI, component video and composite video).
Select input connectors on this unit according to the connectors equipped on the device you want to connect.
If the device connected to this unit is equipped with an HDMI connector, it is recommended to use HDMI connections.
In the HDMI connection, audio and video signals can be transmitted through a single HDMI cable.
•Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV) (vpage41)
•Connecting a DVD player (vpage42)
•Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player compatible with the Denon Link HD function (vpage43)
•Connecting a video camcorder or other device (vpage44)
•Connecting a record player (vpage45)
%
•Connect devices to this unit as indicated by the input sources printed on the audio/video input connectors of this unit.
•This unit can change the source that is assigned to the HDMI IN, DIGITAL AUDIO IN, COMPONENT VIDEO IN, VIDEO IN and AUDIO IN connectors.
How to change the source assigned to connectors (vpage168 “Input Assign”).
41
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlayback
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Connections
Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)
This explanation uses the connection with a satellite tuner/cable TV STB as an example.
Select input connectors on this unit according to the connectors equipped on the device you want to connect.
SIGNAL
GND
AC IN
AM
LOOP
ANT.
COAX.
75Ω
FM
MEDIA
PLAYER
MEDIA
PLAYER
ZONE2
MONITOR
/
ZONE2
PR
/
CR
PB
/
CB
Y
ZONE2 ZONE3 FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
Denon Link HD
DC12V
150mA
MAX.
PHONO
IN
AUDIO
STRAIGHT CABLE
1
2
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
IR
IN OUT
TRIGGER OUT
ARC
ZONE2
MONITOR1
MONITOR2
ANTENNA
NETWORK
MONITOR
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
SURROUND BACK
SUBWOOFER
1 2
OUT
OUT
OUT
AUDIO
PRE OUT
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND BACK
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 6～16
Ω
CLASS 2 WIRING
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT WIDE
FRONT WIDE
CBL
/
SAT
AUDIO
TV
CD
DVD
COAXIAL OPTICAL
1
1
2
2
DIGITAL AUDIO
IN
1 CBL/SAT
2 DVD
3 Blu-ray
6 AUX24 GAME
5 MEDIA PLAYER
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
HDMI
IN
3 Blu-ray
4 MEDIA PLAYER
1 CBL
/
SAT
2 DVD 5 CD
IN
AUDIO
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
1 CBL
/
SAT
2 DVD
Y
P
B
/
CB
PR
/
CR
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN
CBL/
SAT
MEDIA
PLAYER
DVD
2
1
3
IN
VIDEO
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
R
L
R
L
OUT
HDMI
OUT
COAXIAL
AUDIO
AUDIO
RL
OUT
OUT
VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y P
B PR
OUT
(HDMI incompatible device)
Satellite tuner/Cable TV
or or
Satellite tuner/
Cable TV
42
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlayback
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Connections
Connecting a DVD player
This explanation uses the connection with a DVD players as an example.
Select input connectors on this unit according to the connectors equipped on the device you want to connect.
SIGNAL
GND
AC IN
AM
LOOP
ANT.
COAX.
75Ω
FM
MEDIA
PLAYER
MEDIA
PLAYER
ZONE2
MONITOR
/
ZONE2
PR
/
CR
PB
/
CB
Y
ZONE2 ZONE3 FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
Denon Link HD
DC12V
150mA
MAX.
PHONO
IN
AUDIO
STRAIGHT CABLE
1
2
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
IR
IN OUT
TRIGGER OUT
ARC
ZONE2
MONITOR1
MONITOR2
ANTENNA
NETWORK
MONITOR
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
SURROUND BACK
SUBWOOFER
1 2
OUT
OUT
OUT
AUDIO
PRE OUT
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND BACK
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 6～16
Ω
CLASS 2 WIRING
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT WIDE
FRONT WIDE
CBL
/
SAT
AUDIO
TV
CD
DVD
COAXIAL OPTICAL
1
1
2
2
DIGITAL AUDIO
IN
1 CBL/SAT
2 DVD
3 Blu-ray
6 AUX24 GAME
5 MEDIA PLAYER
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
HDMI
IN
3 Blu-ray
4 MEDIA PLAYER
1 CBL
/
SAT
2 DVD 5 CD
IN
AUDIO
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
1 CBL
/
SAT
2 DVD
Y
P
B
/
CB
PR
/
CR
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN
CBL/
SAT
MEDIA
PLAYER
DVD
2
1
3
IN
VIDEO
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
R
L
R
L
AUDIO/
VIDEO
OUT
HDMI
OUT
COAXIAL
AUDIO
AUDIO
RL
OUT
OUT
VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y P
B PR
OUT
(HDMI incompatible device)
DVD player
or or
DVD player
43
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlayback
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Connections
Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player compatible with the Denon Link HD function
By making a Denon Link HD connection to a player compatible with the Denon Link HD function, you can enjoy higher quality playback compared with
when only the HDMI connector connection is made.
When making this connection, set “Input Assign” – “DIGITAL” (vpage169) to “D.LINK”.
SIGNAL
GND
AC IN
AM
LOOP
ANT.
COAX.
75Ω
FM
CBL/
SAT
MEDIA
PLAYER
MEDIA
PLAYER
MEDIA
PLAYER
ZONE2
1 CBL
/
SAT
2 DVD
Y
P
B
/
CB
DVD
2
1
3
MONITOR
/
ZONE2
PR
/
CR
PB
/
CB
Y
P
R
/
CR
ZONE2 ZONE3 FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
CBL
/
SAT
AUDIO
TV
CD
DVD
COAXIAL OPTICAL
1
1
2
2
DIGITAL AUDIO
IN
DC12V
150mA
MAX.
STRAIGHT CABLE
1
2
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
IR
IN OUT
TRIGGER OUT
ARC
ZONE2
MONITOR1
MONITOR2
PHONO
3 Blu-ray
4 MEDIA PLAYER
1 CBL
/
SAT
2 DVD 5 CD
ANTENNA
NETWORK
MONITOR
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO VIDEO
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
HDMI
OUT
SURROUND BACK
SUBWOOFER
1 2
OUT
OUT
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN
IN
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
OUT
AUDIO
PRE OUT
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT WIDE
FRONT WIDE
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND BACK
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 6～16
Ω
CLASS 2 WIRING
ASSIGNABLE
Denon Link HD
1 CBL/SAT
2 DVD
3 Blu-ray
6 AUX24 GAME
5 MEDIA PLAYER
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
HDMI
IN
Link HD
Denon
OUT
HDMI
Blu-ray Disc
player
%
•Both HDMI and Denon Link HD connections are required for this
connection method.
•Set the audio input mode to “Auto” or “HDMI” using “Input Mode”
(vpage171) menu.
44
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlayback
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Connections
Connecting a video camcorder or other device
This explanation uses the connection with a video camcorders as an example.
Connect a playback device to this unit, such as a video camcorder or game console.
R
L
R
L
OUT
HDMI
AUDIO
AUDIO
RL
OUT
OUT
VIDEO
VIDEO
(HDMI incompatible
device)
Video camcorder
Video
camcorder
45
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlayback
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Connections
Connecting a record player
This unit is compatible with turntables equipped with a moving magnet (MM) phono cartridge. When you connect to a turntable with a low output moving
coil (MC) cartridge, use a commercially available MC head amp or a step-up transformer.
If you set this unit’s input source to “PHONO” and you accidentally increase the volume without having a turntable connected, you may hear a hum noise
from the speakers.
AC IN
AM
LOOP
ANT.
COAX.
75Ω
FM
CBL/
SAT
MEDIA
PLAYER
MEDIA
PLAYER
MEDIA
PLAYER
ZONE2
1 CBL
/
SAT
2 DVD
Y
P
B
/
CB
DVD
2
1
3
MONITOR
/
ZONE2
PR
/
CR
PB
/
CB
Y
P
R
/
CR
ZONE2 ZONE3 FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
Denon Link HD
CBL
/
SAT
AUDIO
TV
CD
DVD
COAXIAL OPTICAL
1
1
2
2
DIGITAL AUDIO
IN
DC12V
150mA
MAX.
STRAIGHT CABLE
1
2
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
IR
IN OUT
TRIGGER OUT
ARC
1 CBL/SAT
2 DVD
3 Blu-ray
6 AUX24 GAME
5 MEDIA PLAYER
ZONE2
MONITOR1
MONITOR2
3 Blu-ray
4 MEDIA PLAYER
1 CBL
/
SAT
2 DVD 5 CD
ANTENNA
NETWORK
MONITOR
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO VIDEO
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
HDMI
IN
HDMI
OUT
SURROUND BACK
SUBWOOFER
1 2
OUT
OUT
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN
IN
AUDIO
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
OUT
AUDIO
PRE OUT
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT WIDE
FRONT WIDE
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND BACK
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 6～16
Ω
CLASS 2 WIRING
ASSIGNABLE
PHONO
IN
AUDIO
SIGNAL
GND
GND
AUDIO
OUT
L
R
Record player
(MM cartridge)
NOTE
•The SIGNAL GND terminal of this unit is not a safety ground
connection. Connect it to reduce noise when noise is excessive.
Note that depending on the record player, connecting the ground line
may have the reverse eect of increasing noise. In this case, it is not
necessary to connect the ground line.
46
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlayback
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Connections
Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port
To connect an iPod to this unit, use the USB adapter cable that was supplied with the iPod.
For operating instructions see “Playing an iPod” (vpage57) or “Playing a USB memory device” (vpage61).
USB
memory
device
iPod
or
%
•Denon does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power. When using a portable USB hard disk drive (HDD) which came with an AC adapter,
use that device’s supplied AC adapter.
NOTE
•USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub.
•It is not possible to use this unit by connecting the unit’s USB port to a PC via a USB cable.
•Do not use an extension cable when connecting a USB memory device. This may cause radio interference with other devices.
48
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlayback
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Connections
Connecting an HDRadio receiver
After connecting the antenna and receiving a broadcast signal
(vpage65 “Listening to HD Radio broadcasts”), fix the antenna with
tape in a position where the noise level becomes minimal.
SIGNAL
GND
CBL/
SAT
MEDIA
PLAYER
MEDIA
PLAYER
MEDIA
PLAYER
ZONE2
1 CBL
/
SAT
2 DVD
Y
P
B
/
C
B
DVD
2
1
3
ZONE2
ZONE3
Denon Link HD
CBL
/
SAT
AUDIO
TV
CD
DVD
COAXIAL OPTICAL
1
1
2
2
DIGITAL AUDIO
IN
DC12V
150mA
MAX.
STRAIGHT CABLE
1
2
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
IR
IN OUT
TRIGGER OUT
1 CBL/SAT
2 DVD
PHONO
3 Blu-ray
4 MEDIA PLAYER
1 CBL
/
SAT
2 DVD 5 CD
NETWORK
MONITOR
IN
VIDEO VIDEO
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
HDMI
IN
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
OUT
AUDIO
FRONT
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
CENTER
SPEAKERS
AM
LOOP
ANT.
COAX.
75Ω
FM
ANTENNA
w eq
FM outdoor
antenna
Direction of
broadcasting station
75 Ω/ohms
coaxial cable
FM indoor antenna
(for HDRadio
broadcasting,
supplied)
AM outdoor
antenna
Ground
AM loop antenna
(for HD Radio broadcasting,
supplied)
Black
White
49
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlayback
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Connections
2 AM loop antenna assembly
1
Put the stand section through the bottom of the loop
antenna from the rear and bend it forward.
2
Insert the projecting part into the square hole in the
stand.
Stand
Square
hole
Projecting
part
Loop
antenna
2 Using the AM loop antenna
Suspending on a wall
Suspend directly on a wall without
assembling.
Nail, tack, etc.
Standing alone
Use the procedure shown above to
assemble.
NOTE
•Do not connect two FM antennas simultaneously.
•Even if an external AM antenna is used, do not disconnect the AM loop antenna.
•Make sure the AM loop antenna lead terminals do not touch metal parts of the
panel.
•If the signal has noise interference, connect the ground terminal (GND) to reduce
noise.
•If you are unable to receive a good broadcast signal, we recommend installing an
outdoor antenna. For details, inquire at the retail store where you purchased the
unit.
50
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlayback
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Connections
Connecting to a home network (LAN)
You can connect this unit to your home network (LAN) to perform various types of playbacks and operations as follows.
•Playback of network audio such as Internet
Radio and from your media server(s)
•Playback of music content from online
streaming services
•Using the Apple AirPlay function
•Operation on this unit via the network
•Firmware Update
%
•With this unit, it is possible to use the DHCP and
Auto IP functions to make the network settings
automatically.
•When using this unit with the broadband router’s
DHCP function enabled, this unit automatically
performs the IP address setting and other settings.
•When using this unit connected to a network with no
DHCP function, make the settings for the IP address,
etc., at “Network” (vpage189).
SIGNAL
GND
CBL/
SAT
MEDIA
PLAYER
MEDIA
PLAYER
ZONE2
1 CBL
/
SAT
2 DVD
Y
P
B
/
CB
DVD
2
1
3
MONITOR
/
ZONE2
PR
/
CR
PB
/
CB
Y
P
R
/
CR
ZONE2 ZONE3 FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
Denon Link HD
CBL
/
SAT
AUDIO
TV
CD
DVD
COAXIAL OPTICAL
1
1
2
2
DIGITAL AUDIO
IN
DC12V
150mA
MAX.
STRAIGHT CABLE
1
2
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
IR
IN OUT
TRIGGER OUT
ARC
1 CBL/SAT
2 DVD
3 Blu-ray
6 AUX24 GAME
5 MEDIA PLAYER
ZONE2
MONITOR1
MONITOR2
PHONO
3 Blu-ray
4 MEDIA PLAYER
1 CBL
/
SAT
2 DVD 5 CD
MONITOR
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO VIDEO
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
HDMI
IN
SURROUND BACK
OUT
OUT
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN
FRONT WIDE
FRONT WIDE
NETWORK
Internet
To WAN side
Router
To LAN port
To LAN port
LAN port/
Ethernet
connector
LAN port/
Ethernet
connector
PC
NAS
(Network Attached
Storage)
Modem
For connections to the Internet, contact an ISP (Internet Service Provider) or a computer
shop.
51
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlayback
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Connections
%
•When using this unit, we recommend you use a router equipped with the following
functions:
•Built-in DHCP server
This function automatically assigns IP addresses on the LAN.
•Built-in 100BASE-TX switch
When connecting multiple devices, we recommend a switching hub with a speed
of 100 Mbps or greater.
•Use only a shielded STP or ScTP LAN cable which is easily available at electronics
stores (CAT-5 or greater recommended).
•The normal shielded-type LAN cable is recommended. If a flat-type cable or
unshielded-type cable is used, other devices could be aected by noise.
NOTE
•The types of routers that can be used depend on the ISP. Contact your ISP or a
computer shop for details.
•This unit is not compatible with PPPoE. A PPPoE-compatible router is required if
you have a contract for a type of line set by PPPoE.
•Do not connect an NETWORK connector directly to the LAN port/ Ethernet
connector on your computer.
52
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlayback
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Connections
Connecting an external control device
REMOTE CONTROL jacks
If this unit is installed in a location that is out of range of the signal from
the remote control unit (such as when installed in a cabinet), you can still
operate the unit and the devices connected to it by using a commercially
available IR receiver.
You can also use it to remotely control ZONE2 and ZONE3 (another room).
SIGNAL
GND
AC IN
AM
LOOP
ANT.
COAX.
75Ω
FM
CBL/
SAT
MEDIA
PLAYER
MEDIA
PLAYER
MEDIA
PLAYER
ZONE2
1 CBL
/
SAT
2 DVD
Y
P
B
/
CB
DVD
2
1
3
MONITOR
/
ZONE2
PR
/
CRPB
/
CB
Y
P
R
/
CR
ZONE2 ZONE3 FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
Denon Link HD
CBL
/
SAT
AUDIO
TV
CD
DVD
COAXIAL OPTICAL
1
1
2
2
DIGITAL AUDIO
IN
DC12V
150mA
MAX.
STRAIGHT CABLE
1
2
RS-232CTRIGGER OUT
ARC
1 CBL/SAT
2 DVD
3 Blu-ray
6 AUX24 GAME
5 MEDIA PLAYER
ZONE2
MONITOR1
MONITOR2
PHONO
3 Blu-ray
4 MEDIA PLAYER
1 CBL
/
SAT
2 DVD 5 CD
ANTENNA
NETWORK
MONITOR
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO VIDEO
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
HDMI
IN
HDMI
OUT
SURROUND BACK
SUBWOOFER
1 2
OUT
OUT
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN
IN
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
OUT
AUDIO
PRE OUT
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND BACK
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 6～16
Ω
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND BACK
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 6～16
Ω
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT WIDE
FRONT WIDE
REMOTE CONTROL
IR
IN OUT
AUX
OUT
Device equipped with a
REMOTE CONTROL IN jack
Infrared
retransmitter
Infrared
sensor
Output
Input
TRIGGER OUT jacks
When a device with TRIGGER IN jack is connected, the connected device’s
power on/standby can be controlled through linked operation to this unit.
The TRIGGER OUT jack outputs a maximum 12 V DC /150 mA electrical
signal.
SIGNAL
GND
AM
LOOP
ANT.
COAX.
75Ω
FM
CBL/
SAT
MEDIA
PLAYER
MEDIA
PLAYER
MEDIA
PLAYER
ZONE2
1 CBL
/
SAT
2 DVD
Y
P
B
/
CB
DVD
2
1
3
MONITOR
/
ZONE2
PR
/
CR
PB
/
CB
Y
P
R
/
CR
ZONE2 ZONE3 FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
Denon Link HD
CBL
/
SAT
AUDIO
TV
CD
DVD
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
1
1
2
2
DIGITAL AUDIO
IN
STRAIGHT CABLE
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
IR
IN OUT
ARC
1 CBL/SAT
2 DVD
3 Blu-ray
6 AUX24 GAME
5 MEDIA PLAYER
ZONE2
MONITOR1
PHONO
3 Blu-ray
4 MEDIA PLAYER
1 CBL
/
SAT
2 DVD 5 CD
ANTENNA
NETWORK
MONITOR
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO VIDEO
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
HDMI
IN
SURROUND BACK
SUBWOOFER
1 2
OUT
OUT
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN
IN
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
OUT
AUDIO
PRE OUT
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND BACK
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 6～16
Ω
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT WIDE
DC12V
150mA
MAX.
1
2
TRIGGER OUT
12 V DC/150 mA trigger-compatible device
NOTE
•Use a monaural mini-plug cable for connecting the TRIGGER OUT jacks. Do not use
a stereo mini-plug cable.
•If the permissible trigger input level for the connected device is larger than 12 V
DC/150 mA, or has shorted, the TRIGGER OUT jack cannot be used. In this case,
turn o the power to the unit, and disconnect it.
53
Appendix
TipsSettingsPlayback
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Connections
Connecting the power cord
After completing all the connections, insert the power plug into the power
outlet.
PB
/
CB
MONITOR
/
ZONE2
PR
/
CRPB
/
CB
Y
P
R
/
CR
ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
ARC
3 Blu-ray
6 AUX24 GAME
5 MEDIA PLAYER
ZONE2
MONITOR1
MONITOR2
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
SURROUND BACK
SUBWOOFER
1 2
OUT
(
ASSIGNABLE
)
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN
PRE OUT
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT WIDE
FRONT WIDE
FRONT HEIGHT
FRONT HEIGHT
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND BACK
IMPEDANCE : 6～16
Ω
ASSIGNABLE
AC IN
CLASS 2 WIRING
To household power outlet
(AC 120 V, 60 Hz)
Power cord (supplied)
54
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Playback
Turning the power on (vpage55)
Selecting the input source (vpage55)
Adjusting the master volume (vpage56)
Turning o the sound temporarily (vpage56)
Playing a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player (vpage56)
Playing an iPod (vpage57)
Playing a USB memory device (vpage61)
Listening to HDRadio™ stations (vpage64)
Listening to Internet Radio (vpage73)
Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS (vpage77)
Viewing photographs on the Flickr site (vpage81)
Listening to Pandora
®
(vpage85)
Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio (vpage92)
Listening to Spotify (vpage95)
Adding to the FAVORITE STATION button (vpage99)
AirPlay function (vpage101)
Convenience functions (vpage104)
Selecting a sound mode (vpage112)
HDMI control function (vpage125)
InstaPrevue function (vpage126)
Sleep timer function (vpage128)
Quick select function (vpage129)
Rec out function (vpage130)
Web control function (vpage132)
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room)
(vpage134)
55
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Basic operation
InstaPrevue
SOUND MODE
RC-1185
ZONE SELECT
FAVORITE STATION
TUNE TUNE
PUREMOVIE GAME
MUSIC
OPTIONINFO
BACK
SETUP
CH/ PAGE
ENTER
2 3
1
1 2 3 4
2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER0+10
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS TUV
ABC. /
DEF
SLEEP
WXYZ
MAIN
DEV. TV AVR
POWER
TUNER
AVR
GAME
CBL /
SAT
Blu-ray
DVD
AUX1
AUX2
NETWORK
INTERNET
RADIO
iPod/
USB
MENU
MEDIA
PLAYER
CD
INPUT
TVDEVICE
MENU
PHONO
TV
AUDIO
VOLUME
MUTE
VOLUME
POWER
MUTE
X
df
:
Input source
select buttons
Turning the power on
1
Press POWER X to turn on power to the unit.
%
•You can also switch the power to standby by pressing X on the main unit.
Selecting the input source
1
Press the input source select button to be played back.
The desired input source can be selected directly.
%
•You can also select the input source by turning SOURCE SELECT knob on the
main unit.
56
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Adjusting the master volume
1
Use VOLUME df to adjust the volume.
•The variable range diers according to the input signal and channel
level setting.
%
•You can also adjust the master volume by turning MASTER VOLUME on the main
unit.
Turning o the sound temporarily
1
Press MUTE :.
•“MUTE” indicator on the display flashes.
•: appears on the TV screen.
%
•The sound is reduced to the level set at “Mute Level” (vpage156).
•To cancel, press MUTE
: again. Muting can also be cancelled by adjusting the
master volume.
Playing a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player
The following describes the procedure for playing DVD player/Blu-ray Disc
player.
1
Prepare for playback.
q
Turn on the power of the TV, subwoofer and player.
w Change the TV input to the input of this unit.
2
Press POWER X to turn on power to the unit.
3
Press DVD or Blu-ray to switch an input source for a
player used for playback.
4
Play the DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player.
57
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Playing an iPod
InstaPrevue
TUNER
AVR
SOUND MODE
RC-1185
MUTE
POWERZONE SELECT
FAVORITE STATION
TUNE TUNE
PUREMOVIE GAME
MUSIC
GAME
CBL /
SAT
Blu-ray
DVD
AUX1
AUX2
NETWORK
INTERNET
RADIO
VOLUME
INFO
SETUP
MENU
2 3
1
1 2 3 4
2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER0+10
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS TUV
ABC. /
DEF
SLEEP
WXYZ
MAIN
MEDIA
PLAYER
CD
INPUT
TVDEVICE
MENU
PHONO
DEV. TV AVR
TV
AUDIO
CH/ PAGE
iPod/
USB
ENTER
OPTION
BACK
uio
p
ENTER
CH/PAGE
df
BACK
OPTION
iPod/USB
1
8
9
6
7
3
2
•You can use the USB cable provided with the iPod to connect the iPod
with the unit’s USB port and enjoy music stored on the iPod.
•For information on the iPod models that can be played back with this
unit, see “Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port”
(vpage46).
58
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Listening to music on an iPod
1
Connect the iPod to the USB port (vpage46).
2
Press iPod/USB to switch the input source to “iPod/
USB”.
“Browse From iPod” is displayed on the display of this unit.
•Nothing is displayed on the TV screen.
3
Operate iPod itself directly while seeing the iPod screen
to play back music.
%
•The iPod display modes include “From iPod” and “On-Screen”.
By default, “From iPod”, where you directly operate the iPod itself while looking
at the iPod screen, is set.
•To change to “On-Screen”, where you perform operations while having the iPod
information displayed on the TV screen, see “Setting operation mode (iPod Browse
Mode)” (vpage59).
NOTE
•Depending on the type of iPod and the software version, some functions may not
operate.
•Note that Denon will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any problems arising
with the data on an iPod when using this unit in conjunction with the iPod.
2 Playing the AirPlay (vpage101)
2 Operations available through the OPTION
button
•Setting operation mode (iPod Browse Mode) (vpage59)
59
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Setting operation mode (iPod Browse
Mode)
In this mode, various lists and screens during playback on the iPod are
displayed on the TV screen.
This section describes the steps up to playing back tracks on the iPod in
“On-Screen”.
1
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Select “iPod Browse Mode”, then press ENTER.
The “iPod Browse Mode” screen is displayed.
3
Use o p to select “On-Screen”, then press ENTER.
•English letters, numbers and certain symbols are displayed.
Incompatible characters are displayed as “.” (period).
•Operations available for “On-Screen” and “From iPod” are listed
below.
Display mode From iPod On-Screen
Playable
files
Music file
P P
Video file
z
Active
buttons
Remote
control unit
(This unit)
P P
iPod
P
z Only the sound is played.
4
Use ui to select the file to be played, then press ENTER.
Playback starts.
Operation buttons Function
1
Playback
3
Pause
2
Stop
8 9
Previous / Next
6 7
(Press and hold)
Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
ENTER
Playback / Pause
(Press and hold)
Stop
ui
Previous / Next
(Press and hold)
Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
CH/PAGE df
Page previous / Page next
%
•The display switches between track title, artist name, and album title etc. each
time the STATUS button is pressed during playback with “iPod Browse Mode”
set to “On-Screen”.
2 Operations available through the OPTION
button
•Performing repeat playback (Repeat) (vpage105)
•Performing random playback (Random) (vpage105)
60
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Performing repeat playback (Repeat)
1
Press OPTION with “iPod Browse Mode” set to
“On-Screen”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Repeat”, then press ENTER.
3
Use o p to select repeat playback mode.
O (Default) : Repeat playback mode is canceled.
One : A file being played is played repeatedly.
All : All files in the folder currently being played are played
repeatedly.
4
Press ENTER.
The display returns to the playback screen.
Performing random playback (Random)
1
Press OPTION with “iPod Browse Mode” set to
“On-Screen”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Random”, then press ENTER.
3
Use o p to select random playback mode.
O (Default) : Disable random playback.
On : Randomly play back all tracks in the current playback folder.
4
Press ENTER.
The display returns to the playback screen.
%
•During random playback, each time playback of a track is completed, another track
is randomly selected for playback from tracks in the folder. Therefore, it’s possible
that you may hear a track played back more than once during random playback.
61
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Playing a USB memory device
InstaPrevue
TUNER
AVR
SOUND MODE
RC-1185
MUTE
POWERZONE SELECT
FAVORITE STATION
TUNE TUNE
PUREMOVIE GAME
MUSIC
GAME
CBL /
SAT
Blu-ray
DVD
AUX1
AUX2
NETWORK
INTERNET
RADIO
VOLUME
INFO
SETUP
MENU
2 3
1
1 2 3 4
2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER0+10
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS TUV
ABC. /
DEF
SLEEP
WXYZ
MAIN
MEDIA
PLAYER
CD
INPUT
TVDEVICE
MENU
PHONO
DEV. TV AVR
TV
AUDIO
CH/ PAGE
iPod/
USB
ENTER
OPTION
BACK
uio
p
ENTER
CH/PAGE
df
BACK
OPTION
iPod/USB
1
8
9
6
7
3
2
•Playing back music or viewing still picture (JPEG) files stored on a USB
memory device.
•Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class and MTP
(Media Transfer Protocol) standards can be played on this unit.
•This unit is compatible with USB memory devices in “FAT16” or
“FAT32” format.
•This unit can play back the following files.
•WMA (Windows Media Audio)
•MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3)
•WAV
•MPEG-4 AAC
•FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec)
•JPEG
•ALAC (Apple Lossless Audio Codec)
62
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Playing files stored on USB memory
devices
1
Connect the USB memory device to the USB port
(vpage46).
2
Press iPod/USB to switch the input source to “iPod/
USB”.
Folder1
Folder2
Folder3
Music1
Music2
Music3
Music4
OPTION
USB [1/9]
Option
3
Use ui to select the file to be played, then press ENTER.
Playback starts.
Operation buttons Function
1
Playback
3
Pause
2
Stop
8 9
Previous / Next
6 7
(Press and hold)
Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
z
ENTER
Playback / Pause
(Press and hold)
Stop
ui
Previous / Next
(Press and hold)
Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
z
CH/PAGE df
Page previous / Page next
z This function is available while an MP3 / WAV / AAC / FLAC file is being played
back.
%
•When an MP3 music file includes album art data, the album art can be displayed
while playing the file.
NOTE
•Note that Denon will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any problems arising
with the data on a USB memory device when using this unit in conjunction with
the USB memory device.
63
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
2 Operations available through the OPTION
button
•Searching content with keywords (Text Search) (vpage107)
•Performing repeat playback (Repeat) (vpage105)
•Performing random playback (Random) (vpage105)
•Playing back still images in sequential order (Slideshow Interval)
(vpage109)
64
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Listening to HDRadio™ stations
InstaPrevue
AVR
SOUND MODE
RC-1185
MUTE
POWERZONE SELECT
PUREMOVIE GAME
MUSIC
GAME
CBL /
SAT
Blu-ray
DVD
AUX1
AUX2
NETWORK
INTERNET
RADIO
iPod/
USB
VOLUME
INFO
SETUP
MENU
2 3
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER0+10
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS TUV
ABC. /
DEF
SLEEP
WXYZ
MAIN
MEDIA
PLAYER
CD
INPUT
TVDEVICE
MENU
PHONO
DEV. TV AVR
TV
AUDIO
TUNER
FAVORITE STATION
1 2 3 4
CH/ PAGE
OPTION
BACK
ENTER
TUNE TUNE
uio
p
ENTER
CH/PAGE
df
0 – 9
BACK
OPTION
TUNE +, –
TUNER
FAVORITE
1 – 4
STATION
•HD Radio stations oer higher sound quality than conventional FM/
AM broadcasts. It is also possible to receive data services and select
broadcasts from among up to eight multicast programs.
•HDRadio Technology provides higher quality sound than conventional
broadcasts and allows reception of data services.
•Digital, CD-quality sound. HD Radio Technology enables local radio
stations to broadcast a clean digital signal. AM sounds like today’s FM
and FM sounds like a CD.
•Program Service Data: Contributes to the superior user experience of
HD Radio Technology. Presents song name, artist, station IDs, and
other relevant data streams.
65
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
•Adjacent to traditional main stations are extra local FM channels. These
HD2/HD3 Channels provide new, original music as well as deep cuts
into traditional genre.
•HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity
Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HDRadio™ and the HD,
HDRadio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital
Corp.
For detailed information on HDRadio Technology, please go to
“www.hdradio.com/”.
•For antenna connections, see “Connecting an HD Radio receiver”
(vpage48).
Listening to HDRadio broadcasts
1
Press TUNER to switch the input source to “HD Radio”.
GTV ScreenH
TUNE+/-
STEREO
HD-AUTO
CH / OPTION
HD Radio
CH 1
FM 92.10MHz
Now Playing
Tune Preset Option
GDisplay of this unitH
01 FM 92.10MHz
2
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
3
Use ui to select “FM/AM”, then press ENTER.
The Band screen is displayed.
66
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
4
Use o p to select “FM” or “AM”, then press ENTER.
FM : When listening to an FM broadcast.
AM : When listening to an AM broadcast.
5
Press TUNE + or TUNE – to select the station you want
to hear.
Scanning is performed until it finds an available radio station. When
it finds a radio station, it stops the scan automatically and tunes in.
%
•The modes for receiving FM broadcasts consists of “Auto” mode that automatically
searches available broadcast stations and “Manual” mode that lets you tune in
using buttons to change the frequency. The default setting is “Auto”. You can also
use “Direct Tune” to tune in by entering the frequency directly.
In “Auto” mode, you cannot tune in to radio stations if the reception is not good. If
this is the case, then use the “Manual” mode or “Direct Tune” to tune in.
Operation buttons Function
TUNE +, – Tuning (up/down) / Multicast switching
CH/PAGE df
Preset channel selection
0 – 9
Preset channel selection (1 – 8) /
Direct frequency tuning (0 – 9)
FAVORITE STATION
1 – 4
Call up favorite stations
(Press and hold)
Add to the favorite stations
2 Adding to the FAVORITE STATION button
(vpage99)
2 Operations available through the OPTION
button
•Tuning in by entering the radio frequency (Direct Tune) (vpage67)
•Presetting the current broadcast station (Preset Memory)
(vpage69)
•Changing the tuning mode (Tune Mode) (vpage67)
•Tuning in to radio stations and presetting them automatically (Auto
Preset Memory) (vpage70)
•Specify a name for the preset broadcast station (Preset Name)
(vpage70)
•Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip) (vpage71)
67
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Tuning in by entering the radio
frequency (Direct Tune)
You can enter the receiving frequency directly to tune in.
1
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Direct Tune”, then press ENTER.
The direct tuner screen is displayed and “–” in the display flashes.
3
Use ui or 0 – 9 to select a number and press p.
The screen that lets you enter the frequency is displayed.
•If o is pressed, the immediately preceding input is cancelled.
4
Repeat step 3 and enter the frequency of the radio
station you want to hear.
5
When setting is completed, press ENTER.
The preset frequency is tuned in.
Changing the tuning mode (Tune Mode)
You can change the mode for tuning into FM broadcasts.
1
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Tune Mode”, then press ENTER.
3
Use o p to select tuning mode, then press ENTER.
Auto : Automatically tune to the station.
HD-Auto : Automatically tune to the HDRadio station.
Analog-Auto : Automatically tune to an analog station and analog
HDRadio station.
Manual : Manually tune to the station.
Analog-Manual : Manually tune to an analog station and analog
HDRadio station.
68
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Selecting audio programs
HD Radio Technology enables stations to broadcast multiple Audio
Program and data services on HD2 / HD3 / HD4 channels.
1
Select the tuning mode (“HD-Auto”, “Auto” or
“Manual”).
2
Press TUNE + or TUNE – to tune in the desired Multicast
channel.
•If the station you are tuning in has multiple audio programs,“HD1”is
indicated on the display.
If it only has one audio program, “HD” is indicated.
•When the unit receives multicast channels, the multicast program
number (HD2) is displayed to the right of the station name.
NOTE
•This function is not available for AM HD Radio stations because they cannot
broadcast multicast channels.
•If digital audio data cannot be received after the station is selected, or if the station
signal is weak, the unit may not be able to receive the multicast channels.
•If the station signal is weak, the digital audio of the multicast channel may cut out.
Listening to preset stations
1
Use CH/PAGE df or 0 – 9 to select the desired preset
channel.
69
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Presetting the current broadcast station
(Preset Memory)
Your favorite broadcast stations can be preset so that you can tune them
in easily. Up to 56 stations can be preset.
1
Tune in the broadcast station you want to preset
(vpage65 “Listening to HDRadio broadcasts”).
2
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
3
Use ui to select “Preset Memory”, then press ENTER.
The list of already preset channels is displayed.
4
Use ui or 0 – 9 to select the channel you want to
preset, then press ENTER.
The current broadcast station that is preset.
•To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to 4.
Channel Default settings
1 – 8
92.10 / 92.30 / 92.50 / 92.70 / 93.10 / 93.50 / 93.70 /
94.10 MHz
9 – 16
94.30 / 94.50 / 94.70 / 94.90 / 95.10 / 95.30 / 95.50 /
95.70 MHz
17 – 24
98.10 / 98.30 / 98.50 / 98.70 / 98.90 / 99.10 / 100.10 /
100.30 MHz
25 – 32
100.50 / 100.70 / 100.90 / 101.10 / 101.30 / 101.50 /
101.70 / 101.90 MHz
33 – 40
103.10 / 103.30 / 103.50 / 103.70 / 103.90 / 104.10 /
104.30 / 104.50 MHz
41 – 48
104.70 / 104.90 / 105.10 / 105.30 / 105.50 / 105.70 /
105.90 / 106.10 MHz
49 – 56
106.30 / 106.50 / 106.70 / 106.90 / 107.10 / 107.30 /
107.50 / 107.90 MHz
70
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Tuning in to radio stations and
presetting them automatically
(Auto Preset Memory)
Up to 56 stations can be preset.
If “Auto Preset Memory” is performed after performing “Preset Memory”,
the “Preset Memory” settings will be overwritten.
1
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Auto Preset Memory”, then press
ENTER.
3
Press ENTER.
The unit starts to tune in to radio stations automatically and preset
them.
•When presetting is completed, “Completed” is displayed for
about 5 seconds and the option menu screen turns o.
Specify a name for the preset broadcast
station (Preset Name)
You can set the name to the preset broadcast station or change it.
Up to eight characters can be input.
1
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Preset Name”, then press ENTER.
The Preset Name screen is displayed.
3
Use o p to select the group of the broadcast station you
want to name.
4
Use ui to select the broadcast station you want to
name, then press ENTER.
5
Use ui to select a name label, then press ENTER.
The screen that lets you edit the preset name is displayed.
•If you select “Set Defaults”, then the unit returns to displaying
the frequency.
6
Enter the characters, then press “OK”.
•For character input, see page148.
71
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Skipping preset broadcast stations
(Preset Skip)
You can set in advance, the stations you do not want to be displayed when
tuning in, by groups or by stations.
The preset skip setting is useful when tuning in, because only your favorite
stations are displayed.
1
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Preset Skip”, then press ENTER.
The Preset Skip screen is displayed.
3
n To set the stations you want to skip by groups
q Use o p to select the group of broadcast stations
you want to skip.
w Press u to select “Set No.z – z to Skip”, then press
ENTER.
All broadcast stations in the group “z – z” you selected are not
displayed.
(z are the selected group numbers)
n To set the stations you want to skip by
stations
q Use o p to select the group of broadcast stations
you want to skip.
w Use ui to select the broadcast station you want to
skip.
e Use o p to select “Skip”.
The station you selected is not displayed.
Cancelling preset skip
1
While the Preset Skip screen is displayed, use o p to
select a group containing a broadcast station to cancel
the skip for.
2
Use ui to select a broadcast station to cancel the skip
for.
3
Use o p to select “On”.
The skip is cancelled.
NOTE
•You cannot cancel the skip for each group.
72
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Check the HDRadio reception
information
1
Press STATUS on the main unit while an HD Radio
broadcast is being received.
The current reception information is shown on the display.
q Normal
w Frequency / Signal strength
e Long Station name / Program and Program type
r Title name / Artist name
t Album name / Genre name
%
•If the station signal weakens while receiving a digital broadcast (while “HD” and
text is displayed), the mode automatically switches to the analog reception mode
(the reception frequency is displayed).
Because of this, the “HD” and text may flicker if the station signal level is weak
and unstable.
73
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Listening to Internet Radio
InstaPrevue
TUNER
AVR
SOUND MODE
RC-1185
MUTE
POWERZONE SELECT
TUNE TUNE
PUREMOVIE GAME
MUSIC
GAME
CBL /
SAT
Blu-ray
DVD
AUX1
AUX2
iPod/
USB
VOLUME
INFO
SETUP
MENU
2 3
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER0+10
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS TUV
ABC. /
DEF
SLEEP
WXYZ
MAIN
MEDIA
PLAYER
CD
INPUT
TVDEVICE
MENU
PHONO
DEV. TV AVR
TV
AUDIO
INTERNET
RADIO
FAVORITE STATION
1 2 3 4
CH/ PAGE
OPTION
BACK
ENTER
NETWORK
INTERNET
FAVORITE
1 – 4
NETWORK
1
2
uio
p
ENTER
CH/PAGE
df
BACK
OPTION
RADIO
STATION
•Internet Radio refers to radio broadcasts distributed over the Internet.
Internet Radio stations from around the world can be received.
•The broad cast station types and specifications supported by this unit for
playback are as follows.
•WMA (Windows Media Audio)
•MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3)
•MPEG-4 AAC
74
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Listening to Internet Radio
1
Prepare for playback.
•Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power
(vpage50 “Connecting to a home network (LAN)”).
2
Press NETWORK.
•You can also press INTERNET RADIO to select the input source
“Internet Radio” directly.
3
Use uio p to select “Internet Radio”, then press
ENTER.
Favorites Internet Radio
Media Server
Spotify
Network
4
Use ui to select the item you want to play, then press
ENTER.
OPTION
Internet Radio [1/7]
zzzzz
Search Stations
Search Podcasts
Recommended Stations
radiodenon.com
Recently Played
Search by Keyword
Option
zzzzz (Country name) :
•Displays typical Internet Radio stations your country.
Search Stations :
•Displays all Internet Radio stations that this unit can tune in to.
Search Podcasts :
•Displays Internet Radio stations in the podcasts that this unit can
tune in to.
Recommended Stations :
•Displays recommended Internet Radio stations.
75
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
radiodenon.com :
•Displays Internet Radio stations added to favorites in vTuner. For
instructions on how to add to favorites in vTuner, see “Using
vTuner to add Internet Radio stations to favorites” (vpage76).
Recently Played :
•Displays recently played Internet Radio stations. Up to 20 stations
can be stored in “Recently Played”.
Search by Keyword :
•Displays Internet Radio stations searched by keyword. For
character input, see page148.
5
Use ui to select the station, then press ENTER.
Playback starts once buering reaches “100%”.
Operation buttons Function
1
Playback
2
Stop
ENTER
(Press and hold)
Stop
CH/PAGE df
Page previous / Page next
FAVORITE STATION
1 – 4
Call up favorite stations
(Press and hold)
Add to the favorite stations
INTERNET RADIO Last played Internet Radio station
%
•The display switches between track title and radio station name etc. each time the
STATUS button is pressed.
•Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “.” (period).
NOTE
•The radio station database service may be suspended or be otherwise unavailable
without notice.
Playing the last played Internet Radio
station
This unit memorizes the last played Internet Radio station. If you press
INTERNET RADIO to switch to the Internet Radio function from another
input source, the last Internet Radio station you listened to is played.
1
Press INTERNET RADIO.
The source switches to “Internet Radio” and the last played radio
station plays.
76
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Using vTuner to add Internet Radio
stations to favorites
There are many Internet Radio stations in the world, and this unit can tune
into these stations. But finding the radio station you want to hear may
be dicult, because there are too many stations. If this is the case, then
please use vTuner, an Internet Radio station search website specifically
designed for this unit. You can use your PC to search Internet Radio
stations and add them as your favorites. This unit can play radio stations
added to vTuner.
1
Check the MAC address of this unit (vpage 189
“Information”).
•The MAC address is necessary when you create an account for
vTuner.
2
Use your PC to access the vTuner website (http://www.
radiodenon.com).
3
Enter the MAC address of this unit, then click “Go”.
4
Enter your E-mail address and a password of your
choice.
5
Select the search criteria (genre, region, language, etc.)
of your choice.
•You can also enter a keyword to search for a station you want to
hear.
6
Select the radio station of your choice from the list, and
then click the Add to Favorites icon.
7
Enter the name of the favorite group, then click “Go”.
A new favorite group that includes the selected radio station is
created.
•Internet Radio stations added to favorites in vTuner can be played
from “radiodenon.com” (vpage74) with this unit.
2 Operations available through the OPTION
button
•Add to favorites from the Option menu (Save to Favorites)
(vpage106)
•Searching content with keywords (Text Search) (vpage107)
•Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time (Slideshow)
(vpage108)
77
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS
InstaPrevue
TUNER
AVR
SOUND MODE
RC-1185
MUTE
POWERZONE SELECT
TUNE TUNE
PUREMOVIE GAME
MUSIC
GAME
CBL /
SAT
Blu-ray
DVD
AUX1
AUX2
INTERNET
RADIO
VOLUME
INFO
SETUP
MENU
2 3
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER0+10
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS TUV
ABC. /
DEF
SLEEP
WXYZ
MAIN
MEDIA
PLAYER
CD
INPUT
TVDEVICE
MENU
PHONO
DEV. TV AVR
TV
AUDIO
CH/ PAGE
ENTER
OPTION
BACK
FAVORITE STATION
1 2 3 4
iPod/
USB
NETWORK
uio
p
ENTER
CH/PAGE
df
BACK
OPTION
1
8
9
6
7
3
2
FAVORITE
1 – 4
NETWORK
STATION
•This unit can play back music files and playlists (m3u, wpl) stored on a PC
and on Network Attached Storage (NAS) that supports DLNA.
•The network audio playback function of this unit connects to the server
using technologies shown below.
•Windows Media Player Network Sharing Service
•Windows Media DRM10
•This unit can play back the following files.
•WMA (Windows Media Audio)
•MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3)
•WAV
•MPEG-4 AAC
•FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec)
•JPEG
•ALAC (Apple Lossless Audio Codec)
78
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Applying media sharing settings
Here, we apply the settings to share music files stored on a PC and NAS on the network.
If you are using a Media Server, be sure to apply this setting first.
2 When using Windows Media Player 12
(Windows 7 / Windows 8)
1
Start up Windows Media Player 12 on the PC.
2
Select “More streaming options...” in the “Stream”.
3
Select “Allowed” in the drop-down list for “AVR-
X4000”.
4
Select “Allowed” in the drop-down list for “Media
programs on this PC and remote connections...”.
5
Click “OK” to finish.
2 When using Windows Media Player 11
1
Start up Windows Media Player 11 on the PC.
2
Select “Media Sharing” in the “Library”.
3
Click the “Share my media” check box, select “AVR-
X4000”, and then click “Allow”.
4
As you did in step 3, select the icon of the device (other
PCs and mobile devices) you want to use as a media
controller, and then click “Allow”.
5
Click “OK” to finish.
2 Sharing media stored in NAS
Change settings on the NAS to allow this unit and other devices (PCs
and mobile devices) used as media controllers to access the NAS. For
details, see the owner’s manual that came with the NAS.
79
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Playing back files stored on a PC and
NAS
Use this procedure to play music files, image files or playlists.
1
Prepare for playback.
q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power
(vpage50 “Connecting to a home network (LAN)”).
w Prepare the computer (vComputer’s operating instructions).
2
Press NETWORK.
3
Use uio p to select “Media Server”, then press ENTER.
Favorites Internet Radio
Media Server
Spotify
Network
4
Use ui to select the server including the file to be
played, then press ENTER.
5
Use ui to select the file, then press ENTER.
Playback starts once buering reaches “100%”.
Operation buttons Function
1
Playback
3
Pause
2
Stop
8 9
Previous / Next
6 7
(Press and hold)
Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
z
ENTER
Playback / Pause
(Press and hold)
Stop
ui
Previous / Next
(Press and hold)
Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
z
CH/PAGE df
Page previous / Page next
FAVORITE STATION 1 – 4
Call up favorite stations
(Press and hold)
Add to the favorite stations
z This function is available while an MP3 / WAV / AAC / FLAC file is being played
back.
80
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
%
•The display switches between track title, artist name, and album title each time the
STATUS button is pressed.
•When a WMA (Windows Media Audio), MP3 or MPEG-4 AAC file includes album
art data, the album art can be displayed while the music files are playing.
•If you use Ver.11 or later of Windows Media Player, the album art for WMA files
can be displayed.
•WMA Lossless files can be played when using a server supporting transcoding,
such as Windows Media Player Ver.11 or later.
NOTE
•When playing back music files with your PC or NAS connected through wireless
LAN, audio may be interrupted depending on your wireless LAN environment. In
this case, play back music files with your PC or NAS connected through wired LAN.
•Depending on the size of the still picture (JPEG) file, some time may be required
for the file to be displayed.
•The order in which the tracks/files are displayed depends on the server
specifications. If the tracks/files are not displayed in alphabetical order due to the
server specifications, searching by the first letter may not work properly.
2 Operations available through the OPTION
button
•Searching content with keywords (Text Search) (vpage107)
•Performing repeat playback (Repeat) (vpage105)
•Performing random playback (Random) (vpage105)
•Add to favorites from the Option menu (Save to Favorites)
(vpage106)
•Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time (Slideshow)
(vpage108)
•Playing back still images in sequential order (Slideshow Interval)
(vpage109)
•Displaying your desired video on the monitor during audio playback
(Video Select) (vpage109)
•Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture
Mode) (vpage110)
•Playing music in All Zone Stereo (vpage111)
81
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Viewing photographs on the Flickr site
InstaPrevue
AVR
SOUND MODE
RC-1185
MUTE
POWERZONE SELECT
PUREMOVIE GAME
MUSIC
GAME
CBL /
SAT
Blu-ray
DVD
AUX1
AUX2
INTERNET
RADIO
iPod/
USB
VOLUME
INFO
SETUP
MENU
2 3
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER0+10
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS TUV
ABC. /
DEF
SLEEP
WXYZ
MAIN
MEDIA
PLAYER
CD
INPUT
TVDEVICE
MENU
PHONO
DEV. TV AVR
TV
AUDIO
CH/ PAGE
OPTION
BACK
ENTER
TUNE TUNE
FAVORITE STATION
1 2 3 4
TUNER
NETWORK
uio
p
ENTER
CH/PAGE
df
BACK
OPTION
2
NETWORK
•Flickr is an online photograph sharing service that started in 2004. You
can use the this unit to view photographs that have been made public
by Flickr users. You do not need an account to use Flickr. To view
photographs that you recorded yourself, you need an account in order to
upload these photographs to the Flickr server. For details, see the Flickr
homepage.
http://www.flickr.com/
•You can view photographs shared by particular users, or all of the
photographs shared on Flickr.
82
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Viewing photographs shared by
particular users
1
Prepare for playback.
•Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power
(vpage50 “Connecting to a home network (LAN)”).
2
Press NETWORK.
3
Use uio p to select “Flickr”, then press ENTER.
Favorites Internet Radio
Media Server
Spotify
Network
4
Use ui to select “Add Flickr Contact”, then press
ENTER.
OPTION
Flickr [1/2]
Add Flickr Contact
All Content
Option
5
In “Contact”, add the screen name (user name you want
to view) you want to add.
•For character input, see page148.
6
After inputting the “Contact”, press “OK”.
The screen name is added to “Contact”, and the screen name you
entered in Step 5 is displayed on the top screen of Flickr.
•If you enter a screen name that does not exist, “The Flickr Contact
you entered could not be found” is displayed. Check and enter the
correct screen name.
83
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
7
Use ui to select the folder, and then press ENTER.
Favorites :
•Displays the favorite photographs of the specified user.
Photostream :
•Displays a list of shared photographs.
PhotoSets :
•Displays the folder (photograph album) list.
Contacts :
•Displays the screen name used by the specified user in Contacts.
Remove this Contact :
•Deletes a user from Flickr Contact.
Add this Contact :
•Adds a user from Flickr Contact.
8
Use ui to select the file, and then press ENTER.
The selected file is displayed.
Operation buttons Function
ENTER
Playback
(Press and hold)
Stop
2
Stop
ui
Previous / Next
CH/PAGE df
Page previous / Page next
84
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Viewing all photographs on Flickr
1
Use ui to select “All Content”, then press ENTER.
OPTION
Flickr [1/2]
Add Flickr Contact
All Content
Option
2
Use ui to select the folder, and then press ENTER.
Interestingness :
•Displays photographs that are popular from the number of user
comments or number of times they are added as favorites.
Recent :
•Displays the most recently added photographs.
Search by text :
•Search for photographs by keyword.
3
Use ui to select the file, and then press ENTER.
The selected file is displayed.
NOTE
•Depending on the file format, some photographs may not be viewable.
2 Operations available through the OPTION
button
•Playing back still images in sequential order (Slideshow Interval)
(vpage109)
•Displaying your desired video on the monitor during audio playback
(Video Select) (vpage109)
•Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture
Mode) (vpage110)
•Playing music in All Zone Stereo (vpage111)
85
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Listening to Pandora
®
InstaPrevue
TUNER
AVR
SOUND MODE
RC-1185
MUTE
POWERZONE SELECT
PUREMOVIE GAME
MUSIC
GAME
CBL /
SAT
Blu-ray
DVD
AUX1
AUX2
iPod/
USB
VOLUME
INFO
SETUP
MENU
2 3
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER0+10
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS TUV
ABC. /
DEF
SLEEP
WXYZ
MAIN
MEDIA
PLAYER
CD
INPUT
TVDEVICE
MENU
PHONO
DEV. TV AVR
TV
AUDIO
CH/ PAGE
OPTION
BACK
ENTER
NETWORK
INTERNET
RADIO
FAVORITE STATION
1 2 3 4
TUNE TUNE
NETWORK
uio
p
ENTER
CH/PAGE
df
BACK
OPTION
1
9
3
2
Pandora is an automated music recommendation and Internet Radio
service created by the Music Genome Project.
To listen to Pandora you will need a free Pandora account. If you do not
have a Pandora account, you can create one at www.pandora.com or from
the Pandora smartphone application.
It is necessary to associate this machine with a Pandora account by visiting
http://www.pandora.com/denon from your PC.
86
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Listening to Pandora
®
1
Prepare for playback.
q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power
(vpage50 “Connecting to a home network (LAN)”).
w Complete step 4 and obtain a Pandora account.
•If you already have a Pandora account, you do not need to
obtain a new account. Use your existing Pandora account.
2
Press NETWORK.
3
Use uio p to select “Pandora”, then press ENTER.
Favorites Internet Radio
Media Server
Spotify
Network
4
If you have a Pandora account, use ui to select “I have
a Pandora account”, then press ENTER.
•If you do not have a Pandora account, press i to select “I am
new to Pandora”. The URL of Pandora and activation code are
displayed. Access the Pandora web page from your PC and
register the displayed activation code and account information.
Then press ENTER.
BACK
Pandora
I have a Pandora account
Please go to
http://www.pandora.com/denon and follow
the instructions there to create a new account.
Your activation code is : zzzzzz
I am new to Pandora
Cancel Continue
This is an identification code required to register your
purchased product to the Pandora service.
This code is used to obtain your account.
87
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
5
Input “Email address” and “Password”.
BACK
Pandora Account
Email address
Password
OK
Enter Email address
Exit
•For character input, see page148.
•Press BACK to cancel the input. When “Cancel Input?” is
displayed, select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
6
After inputting the “Email address” and “Password”,
select “OK”, then press ENTER.
If the “Email address” and “Password” match, the top menu for
Pandora is displayed.
Creating a new station
You can create up to 100 radio stations.
1
Use ui to select “New Station”, then press ENTER.
OPTION
My Station [1/4]
Option
New Station
Quick Mix
Music1 Radio
Sign Out
2
Input a track or artist name, then press “OK”.
BACK
New Station
InputSelect
Cancel
Track or Artist
A
N
0
$
B
O
1
%
C
P
2
&
D
Q
3
‘
E
R
4
(
F
S
5
)
G
T
6
*
H
U
7
+
I
V
8
,
J
W
9
;
K
X
!
<
L
Y
“
=
M
Z
#
>
Clear Insert Delete
O KSpace Cancela/A
Music2
•For character input, see page148.
88
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
3
Use ui to select “Search by Artist” or “Search by
Track”, then press ENTER.
You can search and display a list by track or artist.
BACK
New Station
InputSelect
Cancel
Track or Artist
A
N
0
$
B
O
1
%
C
P
2
&
D
Q
3
‘
E
R
4
(
F
S
5
)
G
T
6
*
H
U
7
+
I
V
8
,
J
W
9
;
K
X
!
<
L
Y
“
=
M
Z
#
>
Clear Insert Delete
O KSpace Cancela/A
Music2
Search by Artist
Search by Track
4
Press ui, select a file (e.g. Music2) from the list, and
press ENTER.
“Radio” is added to the end of a filename, and your new station is
created (e.g. Music2 Radio).
OPTION
My Station [4/5]
New Station
Quick Mix
Music1 Radio
Music2 Radio
Option
Sign Out
Operation buttons Function
1
Playback
3
Pause
2
Stop
9
Skips the current track
ENTER
Playback / Pause
(Press and hold)
Stop
i
Skips the current track
CH/PAGE df
Page previous / Page next
%
•You can create up to 100 Stations (radio stations).
•Your new station will play music with similar qualities to the artist or track
you entered.
89
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Listening to an existing station
1
Use ui and select the radio station (“Music2 Radio”)
that you want to listen to, and press ENTER.
OPTION
Music2 Radio
Title
Now Playing
Artist
Album
00:06 100%
Pause
Next MenuBack
Option
%
•You can Skip up to 6 Tracks that are being played back within 1 hour.
Listening to created radio stations at
random
1
Use ui to select “Quick Mix”, then press ENTER.
Created radio stations are selected at random, and tracks are
streamed.
90
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Giving Feedback and Managing Stations
You can personalize your stations by providing feedback.
1
Press p while a track is playing.
The Pandora menu screen is displayed.
Menu [1/8]
I like this track
I don’t like this track
Why is this track playing?
Create station
Bookmark this artist
Bookmark this track
I’m tired of this track
I like this track :
•Press when you like the track that is being played.
•It will return to the Play Screen. And (Thumbs up) icon is
displayed. (The icon is not displayed on the next track.)
I don’t like this track :
•Press when you don’t like the track that is being played.
•It will return to the Play Screen. And
(Thumbs down) icon is
displayed. (The icon is not displayed on the next track.)
Why is this track playing? :
•Displays the reason why Pandora selected this track.
Create station :
•Creates a Station for the Track or Artist being played.
Bookmark this artist :
•Bookmarks the artist currently being played.
•You can check on a computer or iPhone etc.
•For details, see the Pandora web page.
Bookmark this track :
•Bookmarks the track currently being played.
•You can check on a computer or iPhone etc.
•For details, see the Pandora web page.
I’m tired of this track :
•Press when you don’t like the track that is being played.
•The track will not be played for 1 month.
Delete this station :
•Press when you want to delete the station that is being played.
%
•You can create up to 100 Stations (radio stations).
91
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Sign Out
Disassociate this unit from your Pandora account.
1
Use ui to select “Sign Out”, then press ENTER.
OPTION
My Station [4/4]
Option
New Station
Quick Mix
D&M1 Radio
Are you sure you want to sign out
Yes
No
2
When the popup menu appears, use o p to select “Yes”,
then press ENTER.
2 Operations available through the OPTION
button
•Displaying your desired video on the monitor during audio playback
(Video Select) (vpage109)
•Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture
Mode) (vpage110)
•Playing music in All Zone Stereo (vpage111)
92
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio
InstaPrevue
TUNER
AVR
SOUND MODE
RC-1185
MUTE
POWERZONE SELECT
PUREMOVIE GAME
MUSIC
GAME
CBL /
SAT
Blu-ray
DVD
AUX1
AUX2
iPod/
USB
VOLUME
INFO
SETUP
MENU
2 3
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER0+10
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS TUV
ABC. /
DEF
SLEEP
WXYZ
MAIN
MEDIA
PLAYER
CD
INPUT
TVDEVICE
MENU
PHONO
DEV. TV AVR
TV
AUDIO
CH/ PAGE
OPTION
BACK
ENTER
NETWORK
FAVORITE STATION
INTERNET
RADIO
1 2 3 4
TUNE TUNE
NETWORK
uio
p
ENTER
CH/PAGE
df
BACK
OPTION
1
2
Enjoy anywhere access to the unparalleled content of SiriusXM.
Whether on your computer, smartphone, tablet, Lynx Portable Enjoy
anywhere access to the unparalleled content of SiriusXM.
Whether on your computer, smartphone, tablet, Lynx Portable Radio,
or compatible Internet-connected device, you don’t need to be in your
vehicle to enjoy SiriusXM.
For details, see the SiriusXM homepage.
http://www.siriusxm.com
Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio
Over 120-channels of the SiriusXM programming you love, including
commercial-free music plus sports, talk, news and entertainment.
Listen anywhere on your computer or smartphone.
1
Prepare for playback.
q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power
(vpage50 “Connecting to a home network (LAN)”).
w Access the following website from your PC and obtain a
SiriusXM account.
http://www.siriusxm.com
•If you already have a SiriusXM account, you do not need to
obtain a new account. Select “Sign in” in step 4, and enter
your existing SiriusXM account.
2
Press NETWORK.
93
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
3
Use uio p to select “SiriusXM”, then press ENTER.
Favorites Internet Radio
Media Server
Spotify
Network
4
Select “Sign in”, then press ENTER.
BACK
SiriusXM Sign in
Sign in
Start Trial
Please set your SiriusXM username and password.
You can go to www.siriusxm.com to sign up
for an account. Or,select “Start Trial” below
to start the one-time free trial.
Cancel Enter
5
Input the “Username” and “Password”.
BACK
SiriusXM Sign in
Username
Password
zzzzz
zzzzz
Sign in
Exit Enter
•For character input, see page148.
6
Select the “Sign in”, and then press ENTER.
The top menu of SiriusXM is displayed.
7
Use ui to select the genre, then press ENTER.
8
Use ui to select the file, and then press ENTER.
The selected file is displayed.
94
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Operation buttons Function
1
Playback
2
Stop
ENTER
Playback
(Press and hold)
Stop
CH/PAGE df
Page previous / Page next
Sign Out
Disassociate this unit from your SiriusXM account.
1
Use ui to select “Sign Out”, then press ENTER.
2
When the popup menu appears, use o p to select “Yes”,
then press ENTER.
OPTION
SiriusXM [23/23]
Religion
Rock
Dance/Electronic
Hip-Hop/R&B
Country
Account Info
Sign Out
Option
Are you sure you want to sign out?
Yes No
Are you sure you want to sign out
xxxxxxx?
Yes
No
2 Operations available through the OPTION
button
•Displaying your desired video on the monitor during audio playback
(Video Select) (vpage109)
•Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture
Mode) (vpage110)
•Playing music in All Zone Stereo (vpage111)
95
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Listening to Spotify
InstaPrevue
TUNER
AVR
SOUND MODE
RC-1185
MUTE
POWERZONE SELECT
PUREMOVIE GAME
MUSIC
GAME
CBL /
SAT
Blu-ray
DVD
AUX1
AUX2
iPod/
USB
VOLUME
INFO
SETUP
MENU
2 3
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER0+10
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS TUV
ABC. /
DEF
SLEEP
WXYZ
MAIN
MEDIA
PLAYER
CD
INPUT
TVDEVICE
MENU
PHONO
DEV. TV AVR
TV
AUDIO
CH/ PAGE
OPTION
BACK
ENTER
NETWORK
FAVORITE STATION
INTERNET
RADIO
1 2 3 4
TUNE TUNE
NETWORK
uio
p
ENTER
CH/PAGE
df
BACK
OPTION
1
8
9
6
7
3
2
Introduce your Denon to a whole new world of music. With Spotify, you
can enjoy instant access to millions of songs.
A Spotify Premium subscription is required.
For details, see the Spotify homepage.
http://www.spotify.com
Listening to Spotify
1
Prepare for playback.
q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power
(vpage50 “Connecting to a home network (LAN)”).
w Complete step 5 and obtain a Spotify account.
•If you already have a Spotify account, you do not need to obtain
a new account. Use your existing Spotify account.
2
Press NETWORK.
3
Use uio p to select “Spotify”, then press ENTER.
Favorites Internet Radio
Media Server
Spotify
Network
96
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
4
If you have a Spotify account, then press ENTER.
BACK
Spotify
Get Started
Introduce your Denon to a whole new world
of music. With Spotify, you can enjoy instant
access to millions of songs.
A Spotify Premium subscription is required.
Just subscribe at spotify.com
Exit
5
Use ui p to enter your username and password.
BACK
Enter
Username
Password
zzzzz
zzzzz
Log In
Exit
Spotify Log In
•For character input, see page148.
The types of characters that can be input are as shown below.
GUpper case characters/Numbers/SymbolsH
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
ÄÀÁÂÃÅÆÇÐÈÉÊËÌÍÎÏÑÖÒÓÔÕØÜÙÚÛÝÞ
0123456789
! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) z + , ; < = >
GLower case characters/Numbers/SymbolsH
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
äàáâãåæçðèéêëìíîïñöòóôõøüùúûýþÿß
0123456789
. @ - _ / : ˜ ? [ \ ] ^ ’ { | }
•The password should be no longer than 99 characters.
•Press BACK to cancel the input. When “Cancel Input?” is
displayed, select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
97
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
6
After inputting the username and password, select “Log
In”, then press ENTER.
If the username and password match, the top menu for Spotify is
displayed.
7
Use ui to select menu and then press ENTER.
OPTION
[1/5]
Search
What’s New
Starred
Playlists
Accounts
Spotify
Option
Search :
•Searches for tracks, artists and albums by entering keywords.
What’s New :
•Displays the list of the latest albums.
Starred :
•Displays the list of the starred tracks.
Playlists :
•Displays the playlists for Spotify.
Accounts :
•Manages accounts (Log out, Add new user, Switch to user).
8
Use ui to select a station, and press ENTER to start
playback.
Playback starts and the following screen appears.
OPTION
Spotify
Title
Now Playing
Artist
Album
00:06
Pause
Next MenuBack
Previous Option
Operation buttons Function
1
Playback
3
Pause
2
Stop
8 9
Previous / Next
6 7
(Press and hold)
Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
ENTER
Playback / Pause
(Press and hold)
Stop
ui
Previous / Next
(Press and hold)
Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
CH/PAGE df
Page previous / Page next
98
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
9
Press p while a track is playing.
The Spotify menu screen is displayed.
[1/3]
Star this track
Browse “Artist name”
Browse “Album name”
Track-Artist
Back
Star this track :
•Adds a star to the selected track.
Browse “Artist name” :
•Displays the list of albums by the artist of the track that is being
played back.
Browse “Album name” :
•Displays the list of tracks on the album that is being played back.
%
•The display switches between track title, artist name, and album title each time the
STATUS button is pressed.
2 Operations available through the OPTION
button
•Performing repeat playback (Repeat) (vpage105)
•Performing random playback (Random) (vpage105)
•Displaying your desired video on the monitor during audio playback
(Video Select) (vpage109)
•Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture
Mode) (vpage110)
•Playing music in All Zone Stereo (vpage111)
99
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Adding to the FAVORITE STATION button
With a single press of these, you can call up registered radio stations and
contents
You can add up to four types of content.
1
Press and hold one of the FAVORITE STATION 1 – 4
buttons for 3 seconds or longer while playing back a
content or listening to a radio station.
The content you are playing back or the radio station you are
listening to is registered to the pressed button.
•Contents that can be added to the FAVORITE STATION button
dier depending on the input source.
Input source Contents that can be added
HD Radio Radio station
Internet Radio Top list of content / Internet Radio station
Media Server Top list of content / Track of Media Server
Flickr Top list of content
Pandora Top list of content
SiriusXM Top list of content
Spotify Top list of content
Favorites
Top list of content / Internet Radio station /
Track of Media Server
InstaPrevue
TUNER
AVR
SOUND MODE
RC-1185
MUTE
POWERZONE SELECT
TUNE TUNE
PUREMOVIE GAME
MUSIC
GAME
CBL /
SAT
Blu-ray
DVD
AUX1
AUX2
NETWORK
INTERNET
RADIO
iPod/
USB
VOLUME
OPTIONINFO
BACK
SETUP
CH/ PAGE
MENU
ENTER
2 3
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER0+10
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS TUV
ABC. /
DEF
SLEEP
WXYZ
MAIN
MEDIA
PLAYER
CD
INPUT
TVDEVICE
MENU
PHONO
DEV. TV AVR
TV
AUDIO
FAVORITE STATION
1 2 3 4
FAVORITE
1 – 4
STATION
100
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Playing back content added to the
FAVORITE STATION button
You can easily call up content by pressing the FAVORITE STATION button.
1
Press one of the FAVORITE STATION 1 – 4 buttons that
you added content to.
Playback starts.
%
•Internet Radio stations are already registered to the FAVORITE STATION 1 – 4
buttons. However, you may not be able to play the stations due to restrictions
imposed by the radio stations.
NOTE
•The following operations update the database on the Media Server, which may
make the added music files unplayable.
•When you quit the Media Server and then restart it.
•When music files are deleted or added on the Media Server.
101
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
AirPlay function
Enjoy music from your iTunes library with high quality sound anywhere in
your home.
PC
Router
This unit
Streaming music stored in iPhone, iPod
touch, or iPad directly to the unit
If you update your “iPhone/iPod touch/iPad” to iOS 4.2.1 or later, you can
stream music stored in your “iPhone/iPod touch/iPad” directly to this unit.
1
Make the Wi-Fi settings for iPhone, iPod touch, or iPad.
•For details, see your device’s manual.
2
Startup iPhone, iPod touch, or iPad music or iPod app.
'
is displayed on the iPhone, iPod touch or iPad screen.
3
Tap the AirPlay icon '.
4
Select the speaker you want to use.
Cancel
Denon AVR-X4000
102
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Playing iTunes music with this unit
1
Install iTunes 10, or later, on a Mac or Windows PC that
is connected to the same network as this unit.
2
Turn this unit ON.
Set “IP Control” (vpage189) to “Always On” for this unit.
NOTE
•When “IP Control” is set to “Always On”, the unit consumes more standby
power.
3
Launch iTunes and click the AirPlay icon ' displayed
the window and select this unit from the list.
4
Choose a song and click play in iTunes.
The music will stream to this unit.
Selecting multiple speakers (devices)
It is possible to play iTunes songs on your home’s AirPlay compatible
speakers (devices) other than those of this unit.
1
Click the AirPlay icon ' and select “Multiple”.
2
Check the speakers you want to use.
My Computer
Denon AVR-X4000
Master Volume
AirPlay Single Multiple
NOTE
•In playback using the AirPlay function, the sound is output at the iPhone, iPod
touch, iPad or iTunes volume setting level.
You should turn down the iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes volume prior to
playback and then adjust it to a suitable level.
103
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Perform iTunes playback operations
with the remote control unit of this unit
With this unit’s remote control unit, you can perform iTunes song play,
pause, and auto search (cue) operations.
1
Select “Edit” – “Preferences...” on the menu.
2
Select “Devices” in the iTunes setting window.
3
Check “Allow iTunes audio control from remote
speakers”, and then click “OK”.
%
•+ is displayed on the menu screen while AirPlay is being operated.
•Source input will be switched to “NETWORK” when AirPlay playback is started.
•You can stop AirPlay playback by pressing the
o or choosing other input source.
•To see song and artist names together, press STATUS on the main unit.
•For information about how to use iTunes, also see the Help for iTunes.
•The screen may dier depending on the OS and software versions.
OK Cancel
?
Devices Preferences
General Playback Sharing Store Parental Advanced
more than 5%Warn when
Delete Backup ...
Device backups:
Forget All Remotes
Reset Sync History
of the data on this computer will be changed
Prevent iPods, iPhones, and iPads from syncing automatically
Allow iTunes audio control from remote speakers
Only allow paired or Home Sharing Remotes to control iTunes
iTunes is not paired with any Remotes
Devices
105
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Performing repeat playback (Repeat)
n Supported input sources : USB / Media Server / Spotify
1
While content is playing, press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Repeat”, then press ENTER.
3
Use o p to select repeat playback mode.
O (Default) : Repeat playback mode is canceled.
One : A file being played is played repeatedly.
All : All files in the folder currently being played are played
repeatedly.
4
Press ENTER.
The display returns to the playback screen.
Performing random playback (Random)
n Supported input sources : USB / Media Server / Spotify
1
While content is playing, press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Random”, then press ENTER.
3
Use o p to select random playback mode.
O (Default) : Disable random playback.
On : Randomly play back all tracks in the current playback folder.
4
Press ENTER.
The display returns to the playback screen.
%
•During random playback, each time playback of a track is completed, another track
is randomly selected for playback from tracks in the folder. Therefore, it’s possible
that you may hear a track played back more than once during random playback.
106
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Add to favorites from the Option menu
(Save to Favorites)
You can add up to 100 items as favorites for Internet Radio and Media
Server.
n Supported input sources : Internet Radio / Media Server
1
While content is playing, press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Save to Favorites”, then press ENTER.
“Favorite added” is displayed, and the current content is added to
favorites.
•The display returns to the playback screen when the procedure
is completed.
Playing back content added in “Save to
Favorites”
1
Press NETWORK.
2
Use uio p to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER.
Favorites Internet Radio
Media Server
Spotify
Network
3
Use ui to select the content you want to play, and
then press ENTER.
Playback starts.
107
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Deleting content added to favorites
(Remove from Favorites)
1
Press NETWORK.
2
Use uio p to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER.
3
Use ui to select the content you want to delete from
favorites, then press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
4
Use ui to select “Remove from Favorites”, then press
ENTER.
“Favorite removed” is displayed, and the selected content is
deleted from favorites.
•The display returns to the original screen when the procedure is
completed.
Searching content with keywords (Text
Search)
n Supported input sources : USB / Internet Radio / Media Server
1
While content is playing, press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Text Search”, then press ENTER.
The keyboard input screen is displayed.
3
Enter the first character of the Internet Radio station or
file you want to search for, and then press “OK”.
•For character input, see page148.
4
Use ui to select the content you want to play, and
then press ENTER.
Playback starts.
%
•“Text Search” searches for Internet Radio stations or files that start with the
entered first character from the displayed list.
NOTE
•“Text Search” may not work for some lists.
108
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time (Slideshow)
n Supported input sources : USB
1
Play back a still picture.
•Playing back still pictures stored on USB memory devices
(vpage62).
2
Play back a music file (vpage62).
3
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
4
Use ui to select “Slideshow”, then press ENTER.
The option menu disappears, and the picture you were viewing is
shown on the screen.
n Supported input sources : Internet Radio / Media Server
1
Play back a still picture.
•Playing back still pictures stored on Flickr (vpage81).
•Playing back still pictures stored on Media Server (vpage77).
2
Play back a music file of Media Server or Internet Radio
station (vpage74, 79).
3
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
4
Use ui to select “Slideshow”, then press ENTER.
The option menu disappears, and the picture you were viewing is
shown on the screen.
109
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Playing back still pictures in sequential
order (Slideshow Interval)
You can play back still picture (JPEG) files stored on a USB memory device
or Media Server and pictures on Flickr website as a slide show. The display
time can also be set.
n Supported input sources : USB / Media Server / Flickr
1
While the list is displayed, press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Slideshow Interval”, then press
ENTER.
3
Use o p to set the display time.
O : The slide show is not played back.
5s – 60s : Set the time for displaying a single picture when playing
back images in the slide show.
4
Press ENTER.
The slide show is displayed on the screen.
%
•This unit plays back picture (JPEG) files in the order in which they are stored in
the folder.
Displaying your desired video during
audio playback (Video Select)
This unit can display video from a dierent source on TV during audio
playback.
You can set this for each input source.
n Supported input sources : USB / CD
z
/ HD Radio / NETWORK /
PHONO
z Available when none of HDMI, component video or video connector is
assigned.
1
Press OPTION during audio playback.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Video Select”, then press ENTER.
3
Use o p to select the Video Select mode.
O (Default) : Disable Video Select mode.
On : Enable Video Select mode.
4
If you selected “On” in step 3, press i and select
“Source”.
5
Press o p to select the input source for video you want
to play back, and press ENTER.
110
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Adjusting the picture quality for your
viewing environment (Picture Mode)
n Supported input sources : CBL/SAT / DVD / Blu-ray / GAME/
AUX1 / AUX2 / MEDIA PLAYER / USB / NETWORK / CD
z
/ TV
AUDIO
z
z You can set the picture mode when an HDMI, component video or video
connector is assigned.
1
While content is playing, press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Picture Mode”, then press ENTER.
3
Use o p to select picture mode.
O : No picture quality adjustment is done with this unit.
Standard : The standard mode suited for most living room viewing
environments.
Movie : A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room such as
a theater room.
Vivid : A mode that makes graphic images for games, etc. brighter
and more vivid.
Streaming : A mode suited for low bit rate video sources.
Custom : Adjusts the picture quality manually.
4
Press ENTER.
The display returns to the playback screen.
111
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Playing music in All Zone Stereo
You can play back music in another room (ZONE2/ZONE3) simultaneously
that is played back in MAIN ZONE.
It is useful when you want to enjoy the same music at the same time
in multiple rooms during home party or when you want to play back the
same BGM in the entire house.
The All Zone Stereo function can be set for any source.
%
•Before setting this function, you need to turn on the another room (ZONE2/ZONE3)
for which you want to use the All Zone Stereo function.
1
Press MAIN to switch the zone mode.
MAIN lights.
2
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
3
Use ui to select “All Zone Stereo”, then press ENTER.
4
Use o p to select “On”, then press ENTER.
The input source for the multi-zones (ZONE2/ZONE3) is switched to
the same as the one for MAIN ZONE, and playback in the All Zone
Stereo mode starts.
2 Stopping the All Zone Stereo function
1
During playback in All Zone Stereo, press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “All Zone Stereo”, then press ENTER.
3
Use o p to select “O”, then press ENTER.
%
•The All Zone Stereo function is also stopped when you:
•Turn MAIN ZONE o.
•Change the input source for MAIN ZONE.
•Change the sound mode.
•When “HDMI Audio Out” (vpage 162) is set to “TV”, the All Zone Stereo
function is not available.
112
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Selecting a sound mode
InstaPrevue
TUNER
AVR
SOUND MODE
RC-1185
MUTE
POWERZONE SELECT
FAVORITE STATION
TUNE TUNE
GAME
CBL /
SAT
Blu-ray
DVD
AUX1
AUX2
NETWORK
INTERNET
RADIO
iPod/
USB
VOLUME
OPTIONINFO
BACK
SETUP
CH/ PAGE
MENU
ENTER
2 3
1
1 2 3 4
2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER0+10
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS TUV
ABC. /
DEF
SLEEP
WXYZ
MAIN
MEDIA
PLAYER
CD
INPUT
TVDEVICE
MENU
PHONO
DEV. TV AVR
TV
AUDIO
PUREMOVIE GAME
MUSIC
GAME
MOVIE
MUSIC
PURE
ui
This unit allows you to enjoy various kinds of surround and stereo playback
modes.
Multi-channel audio formats are provided on popular movie and music disc
formats such as Blu-ray and DVD, as well as being supported by digital
broadcasting, and even by streaming movies and music from internet-
based subscription services.
This unit supports playback of almost all of these multi-channel audio
formats. It also supports surround playback of audio formats other than
multi-channel audio such as 2-channel stereo audio.
%
•For audio formats recorded on a disc, see the disc jacket or label.
113
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Selecting a sound mode
1
Press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME to select a sound mode.
MOVIE : Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying movies
and TV programs.
MUSIC : Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying music.
GAME : Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying games.
%
•The MOVIE, MUSIC, or GAME button memorizes the last sound mode selected for
its button. Pressing MOVIE, MUSIC, or GAME recalls the same sound mode as the
one selected at the previous playback.
•If the content played back does not support the previously selected sound mode,
the most appropriate sound mode for the content is automatically selected.
2 Switching the sound mode
•Press and hold MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME displays a list of the sound
modes that can be selected. Each time you press MOVIE, MUSIC or
GAME, the sound mode changes.
•While the list is displayed, you can also use ui to select a sound
mode.
•Try out various surround playback modes and enjoy surround playback
in your favorite mode.
GExampleH When MOVIE is pressed and held
MOVIE SOUND
STEREO
DOLBY PLIIx CINEMA
DTS NEO:X CINEMA
MULTI CH STEREO
MONO MOVIE
VIRTUAL
This unit provides not only sound modes that conform to the formats
recorded on discs such as Dolby and DTS but also extended types
of modes that match your speaker configuration including front height
speakers and surround back speakers and “original sound modes” that
create atmosphere of ROCK ARENA and JAZZ CLUB, etc.
114
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Direct playback
Sound recorded in source is played as is.
1
Press PURE to select “DIRECT”.
Direct playback begins.
%
•While DSD signals are played back, “DSD DIRECT” is displayed.
Pure Direct playback
This mode is for playback with higher sound quality than in “DIRECT”
mode, by turning o the front panel display panel, which can eliminate
faint low level noise from creeping into sensitive analog circuitry.
1
Press PURE to select “PURE DIRECT”.
The display goes dark, and Pure Direct playback begins.
%
•In DIRECT and PURE DIRECT sound modes, the following items cannot be
adjusted.
•Tone (vpage154)
•Restorer (vpage155)
•MultEQ® XT32 (vpage156)
•Dynamic EQ (vpage157)
•Dynamic Volume (vpage158)
NOTE
•Video signals are only output when HDMI signals are played in the PURE DIRECT
mode.
•When the PURE DIRECT mode has been selected, the display turns o after about
5 seconds. The power indicator will remain lit (green). To restore the display press
PURE again, which will set the unit in DIRECT mode.
115
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
2 Description of sound mode types
Dolby sound mode
Sound mode type Description
DOLBY PLgx
z1
This mode can be selected when the Dolby Pro Logic gx decoder is used to play back 2-channel sources in 6.1/7.1-channel
surround sound including the surround back channel(s).
By adding the surround back channel(s), a more enveloping surround environment is produced, compared to Dolby Pro
Logic g.
There are three playback modes: “Cinema” mode that is optimized for movie playback, “Music” mode that is optimized
for music playback, and “Game” mode that is optimized for game play.
DOLBY PLg This mode can be selected when the Dolby Pro Logic g decoder is used to play back 2-channel sources in 5.1-channel
surround sound with an enveloping surround sound experience.
DOLBY PLgz
z2
This mode can be selected when the Dolby Pro Logic gz decoder is used to play back 2-channel sources in 7.1-channel
surround sound with added front height channels.
By adding front height channels, the front soundstage becomes dramatically taller, simulating the eect of listening in
a large movie theater or concert hall.
DOLBY DIGITAL This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded with Dolby Digital.
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
z1
Using the Dolby Digital EX decoder, this mode plays Dolby Digital sources in 6.1/7.1-channel surround sound with added
surround back channel(s).
By adding surround back speaker(s), sounds can be heard coming at you from behind and not just from the sides.
DOLBY TrueHD This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in Dolby TrueHD.
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded with Dolby Digital Plus.
z1 This can be selected when “Speaker Config.” – “Surr.Back” (vpage183) is not set to “None”.
z2 This can be selected when “Speaker Config.” – “Front Height” (vpage184) is not set to “None”.
116
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
DTS sound mode
Sound mode type Description
DTS NEO:X
z1
This matrix decoding technology uses the DTS NEO:X decoder to playback 2-channel source or 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel
surround sound including the surround back channel.
There are 3 modes: “Music” suited for playing music, “Cinema” suited for playing movies, and “Game” which is
optimized for playing games.
DTS SURROUND This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS.
DTS ES DSCRT6.1
z2
This mode is suitable for playing discs recorded in DTS-ES. The surround back channel added using the discrete method
is played as an independent channel.
Since all channels are independent, the 360-degree spacial expressiveness and sound localization are enhanced.
DTS ES MTRX6.1
z3
This mode is suitable for playing discs recorded in DTS-ES.
The surround back channel added to the surround-left and surround-right channels by a matrix encoder at software
recording time is decoded by this unit’s matrix decoder and played from each channel (surround left, surround right,
surround back).
DTS 96/24 This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS 96/24.
DTS-HD This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS-HD.
DTS Express This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS Express.
z1 This mode cannot be selected when DSD signals from Super Audio CD are input.
z2 This mode can be selected when only one surround back speaker is used and no front height speaker is used.
z3 This can be selected when “Speaker Config.” – “Surr.Back” (vpage183) is set to “1spkr”.
PCM multi-channel sound mode
Sound mode type Description
MULTI CH IN This mode can be selected when playing multi-channel PCM/DSD sources from a disc player or external decoder that
features analog multi-channel outputs.
117
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Audyssey DSX
®
sound mode
Sound mode type Description
Audyssey DSX®
(A-DSX)
z
This mode creates playback for the new channels (front wide or front height) in 5.1-channel systems. By adding front
wide or front height channels, the surround sound eects sound become more three dimensional and realistic.
z This can be selected when a setting other than “None” is selected for “Front Height” or “Front Wide”, and a setting other than “None” is selected for “Center” in
“Speaker Config.” (vpage182).
Original sound mode
Sound mode type Description
MULTI CH STEREO This mode is for enjoying stereo sound from all speakers.
Stereo audio (2-channel) sources are played back via the front (L/R) speakers, the surround speakers and if connected
the surround back speakers.
ROCK ARENA This mode simulates the expansive sound of a live concert in an arena.
JAZZ CLUB This mode puts you right in the middle of an intimate jazz club.
MONO MOVIE This mode works with monaural audio sources and delivers a surround sound eect. For optimum channel balance and
surround sound eects, connect the monaural source to both of the front (L/R) audio inputs.
VIDEO GAME This mode provides an exciting, dynamic surround sound eect with your favorite action video games.
MATRIX This mode adds a spacious surround sound eect with stereo music sources.
VIRTUAL This mode lets you experience an expansive surround sound eect when playing back through just the front (L/R)
speakers only, and when listening with stereo headphones.
118
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Stereo sound mode
Sound mode type Description
STEREO This mode plays 2-channel stereo audio with no additional surround sound processing.
•Sound is output from the front left and right speakers, and subwoofer if connected.
•When multi-ichannel signals are inputted, they are mixed down to 2-channel audio and are played back with no
additional surround sound processing.
Direct sound mode
Sound mode type Description
DIRECT This mode provides a direct input-to-output path with minimal audio processing, bypassing any unnecessary stages for
purest sound.
PURE DIRECT This mode provides the direct audio signal path benefit of the Direct mode along with disabling additional stages that
might possibly have an aect on sound quality.
In Pure Direct mode, the following elements are turned o:
•The front panel display and its driver circuitry are shut down. The display will temporarily come on when adjusting the
volume, etc., but will turn o again once the adjustment has been made.
•The analog video input/output switcher and processor is disabled.
119
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
2 Sound mode
•The following sound modes can be selected using the MOVIE, MUSIC, GAME, and PURE buttons.
•Adjust the sound field eect with the menu “Surround Parameter” (vpage151) to enjoy surround sound the way you like it.
Input signal Sound mode NOTE
Sound mode
MOVIE MUSIC GAME
2-channel z1
STEREO
S S S
DOLBY PLg/gx Cinema z2 S
DOLBY PLg/gx Music z2 S
DOLBY PLg/gx Game z2 S
DOLBY PLg/gx Cinema A-DSX z3 S
DOLBY PLg/gx Music A-DSX z3 S
DOLBY PLg/gx Game A-DSX z3 S
DOLBY PLgz z2 S S S
DTS NEO:X Cinema
z2 z3 S
DTS NEO:X Music
z2 z3 S
DTS NEO:X Game
z2 z3 S
MULTI CH STEREO
z3 S S S
MONO MOVIE
z3 S
ROCK ARENA
z3 S
JAZZ CLUB
z3 S
MATRIX
z3 S
VIDEO GAME
z3 S
VIRTUAL
z3 S S S
z1 2-channel also includes analog input.
z2 This mode plays back 2-channel sources in 5.1 or 7.1-channel playback. It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when only front speakers are used.
z3 This mode cannot be selected when DSD signals from Super Audio CD are input.
120
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Input signal Sound mode NOTE
Sound mode
MOVIE MUSIC GAME
Multi-channel z4
STEREO
S S S
Dolby Digital
DOLBY DIGITAL
S S S
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
S S S
DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgx Cinema S
DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgx Music S
DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgz S S S
DOLBY DIGITAL A-DSX
z5 S S S
DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgx Cinema A-DSX z3 S
DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgx Music A-DSX z3 S
DOLBY DIGITAL + NEO:X Cinema
S
DOLBY DIGITAL + NEO:X Music
S
DOLBY DIGITAL + NEO:X Game
S
Dolby TrueHD
DOLBY TrueHD
S S S
DOLBY TrueHD + EX
S S S
DOLBY TrueHD + PLgx Cinema S
DOLBY TrueHD + PLgx Music S
DOLBY TrueHD + PLgz S S S
DOLBY TrueHD A-DSX
z5 S S S
DOLBY TrueHD + PLgx Cinema A-DSX z3 S
DOLBY TrueHD + PLgx Music A-DSX z3 S
DOLBY TrueHD + NEO:X Cinema
S
DOLBY TrueHD + NEO:X Music
S
DOLBY TrueHD + NEO:X Game
S
z3 This mode cannot be selected when DSD signals from Super Audio CD are input.
z4 Some sound modes cannot be selected, depending on the audio format or number of channels of the input signal. For details, see “Types of input signals, and
corresponding sound modes” (vpage238).
z5 These modes add new channels to 5.1-channel surround using Audyssey DSX® processing (vpage159 “Audyssey DSX®”).
121
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Input signal Sound mode NOTE
Sound mode
MOVIE MUSIC GAME
Multi-channel z4
Dolby Digital Plus
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus
S S S
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + EX
S S S
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + PLgx Cinema S
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + PLgx Music S
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + PLgz S S S
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus A-DSX
z5 S S S
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + PLgx Cinema A-DSX z3 S
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + PLgx Music A-DSX z3 S
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + NEO:X Cinema
S
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + NEO:X Music
S
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + NEO:X Game
S
DTS
DTS SURROUND
S S S
DTS ES DSCRT 6.1
S S S
DTS ES MTRX 6.1
S S S
DTS 96/24
S S S
DTS + PLgx Cinema S
DTS + PLgx Music S
DTS + PLgz S S S
DTS SURROUND A-DSX
z5 S S S
DTS + NEO:X Cinema
S
DTS + NEO:X Music
S
DTS + NEO:X Game
S
z3 This mode cannot be selected when DSD signals from Super Audio CD are input.
z4 Some sound modes cannot be selected, depending on the audio format or number of channels of the input signal. For details, see “Types of input signals, and
corresponding sound modes” (vpage238).
z5 These modes add new channels to 5.1-channel surround using Audyssey DSX® processing (vpage159 “Audyssey DSX®”).
122
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Input signal Sound mode NOTE
Sound mode
MOVIE MUSIC GAME
Multi-channel z4
DTS-HD /
DTS Express
DTS-HD HI RES
S S S
DTS-HD MSTR
S S S
DTS-HD MSTR A-DSX
z5 S S S
DTS Express
S S S
DTS Express A-DSX
z5 S S S
DTS-HD + PLgx Cinema S
DTS-HD + PLgx Music S
DTS-HD + PLgz S S S
DTS-HD HI RES A-DSX
z5 S S S
DTS-HD + NEO:X Cinema
S
DTS-HD + NEO:X Music
S
DTS-HD + NEO:X Game
S
PCM multi-channel
MULTI CH IN
S S S
MULTI CH IN 7.1
S S S
MULTI IN + PLgx Cinema S
MULTI IN + PLgx Music S
MULTI IN + PLgz S S S
MULTI CH IN A-DSX
z5 S S S
MULTI CH IN + PLgx Cinema A-DSX z3 S
MULTI CH IN + PLgx Music A-DSX z3 S
MULTI IN + DOLBY EX
z3 S S S
MULTI IN + NEO:X Cinema
z3 S
MULTI IN + NEO:X Music
z3 S
MULTI IN + NEO:X Game
z3 S
z3 This mode cannot be selected when DSD signals from Super Audio CD are input.
z4 Some sound modes cannot be selected, depending on the audio format or number of channels of the input signal. For details, see “Types of input signals, and
corresponding sound modes” (vpage238).
z5 These modes add new channels to 5.1-channel surround using Audyssey DSX® processing (vpage159 “Audyssey DSX®”).
123
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Input signal Sound mode NOTE
Sound mode
MOVIE MUSIC GAME
Multi-channel
z4
MULTI CH STEREO
z3 S S S
MONO MOVIE
z3 S
ROCK ARENA
z3 S
JAZZ CLUB
z3 S
MATRIX
z3 S
VIDEO GAME
z3 S
VIRTUAL
z3 S S S
z3 This mode cannot be selected when DSD signals from Super Audio CD are input.
z4 Some sound modes cannot be selected, depending on the audio format or number of channels of the input signal. For details, see “Types of input signals, and
corresponding sound modes” (vpage238).
124
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
2 Views on the display
DOLBY D + PL z
Blu-ray
q w
q Shows a decoder to be used.
•A DOLBY DIGITAL Plus decoder is displayed as “DOLBY D +”.
w Shows a decoder that creates sound output from the surround back
speakers.
•“+ PLgz” indicates the front height sound from front height speakers.
125
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
HDMI control function
A recent addition to the HDMI standard is CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), which allows control signals from one device to communicate with
another device via the HDMI cable connection. Not all HDMI-equipped devices have this capability.
Setting procedure
1
Set the HDMI output connector corresponding with the
HDMI control function.
Set “HDMI Control” (vpage163) to “On”.
2
Turn the power on for all the devices connected by
HDMI cable.
3
Set the HDMI control function for all devices connected
by HDMI cable.
•Please consult the operating instructions for the connected
devices to check the settings.
•Carry out steps 2 and 3 should any of the devices be unplugged.
4
Switch the television input to the HDMI input connected
to this unit.
5
Switch this unit input to the HDMI input source and
check if the picture from the player is ok.
6
When you turn the TV’s power to standby, check that
the power of this unit also goes to standby.
NOTE
•Some functions may not operate depending on the connected TV or player. Check
the owner’s manual of each device for details beforehand.
•The HDMI ZONE2 function is not compatible with the HDMI control function.
•When the HDMI ZONE2 function is used with “HDMI Control” in the menu set to
“On”, the HDMI ZONE2 function may not fully work.
126
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
InstaPrevue function
TUNER
AVR
SOUND MODE
RC-1185
MUTE
POWERZONE SELECT
FAVORITE STATION
TUNE TUNE
PUREMOVIE GAME
MUSIC
GAME
CBL /
SAT
Blu-ray
DVD
AUX1
AUX2
NETWORK
INTERNET
RADIO
iPod/
USB
VOLUME
INFO
BACK
SETUP
CH/ PAGE
MENU
2 3
1
1 2 3 4
2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER0+10
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS TUV
ABC. /
DEF
SLEEP
WXYZ
MEDIA
PLAYER
CD
INPUT
TVDEVICE
MENU
PHONO
DEV. TV AVR
TV
AUDIO
MAIN
InstaPrevue
OPTION
ENTER
MAIN
InstaPrevue
uio
p
ENTER
OPTION
You can display sub screens on the main screen to preview playback video
of the HDMI input connected to this unit. You can also display various
video inputs in a single screen to switch input sources such as Blu-ray,
DVD, and GAME while viewing them on sub screens.
%
•The InstaPrevue function is compatible with the HDMI 1 – 6 connectors. It is not
supported for the AUX1-HDMI7 connector on the front panel.
127
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Switching input sources
Switch to the desired input source on this unit while viewing sub screens.
1
Press MAIN to switch the zone mode.
MAIN lights.
2
Press InstaPrevue.
The main screen (current input video) and sub screens (other input
video) are displayed.
3
Use uio p to select the desired input source from the
sub screen, and press ENTER.
Setting how to display sub screens
You can select to display five sub screens or only one sub screen.
1
While sub screens are displayed, press OPTION.
The InstaPrevue setting screen is displayed.
2
Press o p in “HDMI Input” to select how to display sub
screens.
All (Default) : Displays five sub screens.
One at time : Displays only one sub screen.
3
Press OPTION to enter the setting.
Changing the display location of sub
screens
You can change the display location of sub screens to a desired location.
1
While sub screens are displayed, press OPTION.
The InstaPrevue setting screen is displayed.
2
Press i to select “Location” and use o p to select the
location where you want to display sub screens.
3
Press OPTION to enter the setting.
%
•The InstaPrevue function is available when HDMI signals are input to the main
screen. However, it is not available while computer’s resolution (e.g. VGA) or 3D
video content is being played back.
•The InstaPrevue function is not available when the power of ZONE2 is on.
128
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
InstaPrevue
TUNER
AVR
SOUND MODE
RC-1185
MUTE
POWER
FAVORITE STATION
TUNE TUNE
PUREMOVIE GAME
MUSIC
GAME
CBL /
SAT
Blu-ray
DVD
AUX1
AUX2
NETWORK
INTERNET
RADIO
iPod/
USB
VOLUME
OPTIONINFO
BACK
SETUP
CH/ PAGE
MENU
ENTER
1
1 2 3 4
2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER0+10
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS TUV
ABC. /
DEF
WXYZ
MEDIA
PLAYER
CD
INPUT
TVDEVICE
MENU
PHONO
DEV. TV AVR
TV
AUDIO
ZONE SELECT
2 3 MAIN
SLEEP
ZONE2
ZONE3
MAIN
SLEEP
Sleep timer function
You can have the power automatically switched to standby once a set
time has elapsed. This is convenient for viewing and listening while going
to sleep.
The sleep timer function can be set for each zone.
Using the sleep timer
1
Press MAIN, ZONE2 or ZONE3 to switch the zone mode.
The button for the selected zone is lit.
2
Press SLEEP and display the time you want to set.
•The indicator on the display lights.
•You can set the sleep timer in the range from 10 to 120 minutes
in steps of 10 minutes.
2 To cancel the sleep timer
Press SLEEP to set “O”.
The indicator on the display turns o.
%
•The sleep timer is also cancelled when this unit is set to the standby mode or the
MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 or ZONE3 power is turned o.
NOTE
•The sleep timer function cannot turn o the power of devices connected to this
unit. To turn o the power of those connected devices, set up sleep timers on the
connected devices themselves.
129
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Quick select function
You can save settings such as the input source selection, volume level, and sound mode at the QUICK SELECT 1 – 4 buttons.
You can simply press one of the set QUICK SELECT buttons for subsequent playback to switch to various saved settings all at once.
By saving frequently used settings at the QUICK SELECT 1 – 4 buttons, you will always be able to easily call up the same playback environment.
Calling up the Quick Select
1
Press QUICK SELECT.
The Quick Select settings for the button you pressed are called up.
•The default settings of each Quick Select function are as shown below.
Button Input source Volume Sound mode
QUICK SELECT 1 CBL/SAT 40 STEREO
QUICK SELECT 2 Blu-ray 40 STEREO
QUICK SELECT 3 GAME 40 STEREO
QUICK SELECT 4 NETWORK 40 STEREO
Changing the settings
1
Set the items below to the settings you want to save.
q Input source
z
(vpage55)
w Volume (vpage56)
e Sound mode (vpage112)
r Audyssey (Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®,
Audyssey Dynamic Volume®) (vpage156)
2
Press and hold the desired QUICK SELECT until “Quickz
Memory” appears on the display.
The current settings will be memorized.
z The number for the QUICK SELECT button you pressed is displayed.
2 Changing the Quick Select Name
On this unit, you can change the Quick Select Name displayed on the
menu to the name that you prefer.
For the name change method, see “Quick Select Names”
(vpage195).
130
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Rec out function
MUTE
VOLUME
InstaPrevue
SOUND MODE
RC-1185
ZONE SELECT
FAVORITE STATION
TUNE TUNE
PUREMOVIE GAME
MUSIC
OPTIONINFO
BACK
SETUP
CH/ PAGE
ENTER
2 3
1
1 2 3 4
2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER0+10
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS TUV
ABC. /
DEF
SLEEP
WXYZ
MAIN
DEV. TV AVR
TUNER
AVR
GAME
CBL /
SAT
Blu-ray
DVD
AUX1
AUX2
NETWORK
INTERNET
RADIO
iPod/
USB
MEDIA
PLAYER
CD
TVDEVICE
PHONO
TV
AUDIO
POWER
AVR
MENU
INPUT
MENU
Input source select
buttons
When using the audio/video recording connectors (MEDIA PLAYER
outputs), you can record the audio or video.
R
L
MEDIA
PLAYER
MEDIA
PLAYER
ZONE2
MONITOR
VIDEO
OUT
OUT
AUDIO
This unit
Recorder
131
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Recording on an External Device
1
Press the input source select button to choose the input
source to be recorded.
2
Start recording.
•For operating instructions, refer to the respective device’s
operating instructions.
%
•Recordings you make are for your personal enjoyment and should not be used for
other purposes without permission of the copyright holder.
•To record video signals through this unit, use the video cable for connection
between this unit and the player.
•Make an analog connection for audio signals.
132
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Web control function
You can control this unit from a web control screen on a web browser.
PC
Router This unit
%
•This unit and the PC need to be connected to the network properly (vpage50
“Connecting to a home network (LAN)”) in order to use the web control function.
•Depending on the settings of your security-related software, you may not be able
to access this unit from your PC. If this is the case, then change the settings of the
security-related software.
Controlling the unit from a web control
1
Switch the “IP Control” (vpage 189) setting to
“Always On”.
2
Check the IP address of this unit with “Information”
(vpage189).
Network/Information
Friendly name
DHCP
IP Address
MAC Address
Displays the current network settings of the AVR
Denon AVR-X4000
On
192.168.100.19
0005cd000000
Checking the IP address.
3
Start up the web browser.
133
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
4
Enter the IP address of this unit in browser’s address
box.
For example, if the IP address of this unit is “192.168.100.19”,
enter “http://192.168.100.19/”.
http://192.168.100.19/index.asp
INDEX
File
Edit View Tools HelpFavorites
Denon AVR-X4000
Web Controller
MAIN ZONE
0.0
CBL/SAT
Setup Menu
ZONE2
20
NETWORK
ZONE3
CBL/SAT
Setup Menu
5
When the top menu is displayed, click on the menu item
you want to operate.
http://192.168.100.19/index.asp
INDEX
File
Edit View Tools HelpFavorites
Denon AVR-X4000
Web Controller
MAIN ZONE
0.0
CBL/SAT
Setup Menu
ZONE2
20
NETWORK
ZONE3
CBL/SAT
Setup Menu
%
•You can use the Web control function with Internet Explorer 8 or later to memorize
and call up various settings on this unit.
To memorize settings, click “SAVE” on the Setup Menu screen.
To call up settings, click “LOAD” on the Setup Menu screen.
134
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room)
You can operate this unit to enjoy video and audio in a room (ZONE2 and ZONE3) that is dierent from the room where this unit is placed (MAIN ZONE).
You can simultaneously play back the same source in both the MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3. You can also play back separate sources in the MAIN
ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3.
Connecting ZONE
You can use the following three methods to play back video and audio in
ZONE2 and ZONE3.
•Connection through the HDMI ZONE2 connector (vpage134)
•Connection through the video output connector and speaker output
connector (vpage135)
•Connection through the video output connector and external amp
(vpage138)
2 Connection 1 : Connection through the HDMI
ZONE2 connector
When a TV is connected to the HDMI ZONE2 OUT connector, you can
play back a video or audio from the device connected to the HDMI 1 – 6
IN connector in ZONE2 (HDMI ZONE2 function).
HDMI
ZONE2
HDMI
ZONE2MAIN ZONE
This unit
135
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
2 Connection 2 : Connection through the video output connector and speaker output connector
•When “Assign Mode” (vpage181) in the menu is set to any of the following audio is output from speakers in ZONE2 or ZONE3.
n Assign Mode : 5.1ch + ZONE2
IN
VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y P
B PR
IN
w q ww q
(L) (R)
MAIN ZONE
ZONE2
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND BACK
IMPEDANCE : 6～16
Ω
ASSIGNABLE
MEDIA
PLAYER
ZONE2
MONITOR
/
ZONE2
PR
/
CR
PB
/
CB
Y
MONITOR
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
OUT
OUT
This unit
or
n Assign Mode : 5.1ch + ZONE3
ZONE3
w q w q
(L) (R)
MAIN ZONE
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND BACK
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 6～16
Ω
ASSIGNABLE
This unit
136
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
n Assign Mode : 5.1ch + ZONE2/3-MONO
IN
VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y P
B PR
IN
w q
w q
MAIN ZONE ZONE2
ZONE3
FRONT HEIGHT
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUND BACK
IMPEDANCE : 6～16
Ω
ASSIGNABLE
MEDIA
PLAYER
ZONE2
MONITOR
/
ZONE2
PR
/
CR
PB
/
CB
Y
MONITOR
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
OUT
OUT
This unit
or
137
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
2 Connection 3 : Connection through the video output connector and external amp
The audio signals of this unit’s ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output connectors are output to the ZONE2 and ZONE3 amplifiers and played on these
amplifiers.
R
L
R
L
IN
VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y P
B PR
IN
ZONE2
MAIN ZONE
AUX IN
ZONE3
AUX IN
MEDIA
PLAYER
ZONE2
MONITOR
/
ZONE2
PR
/
CR
PB
/
CB
Y
MONITOR
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
OUT
OUT
ZONE2 ZONE3
This unit
Power
amplifiers
Power
amplifiers
or
%
•We recommend using high quality pin-plug (RCA type) cables for audio connections in order to prevent noise.
•If you select a same input source for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, audio playback may be restricted.
•When “Component Video Out” (vpage164) in the menu is set to “ZONE2”, the component video output connector outputs the ZONE2 video.
•The menu screen is not output in ZONE2.
138
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
Playback in ZONE
InstaPrevue
SOUND MODE
RC-1185
ZONE SELECT
FAVORITE STATION
TUNE TUNE
PUREMOVIE GAME
MUSIC
OPTIONINFO
BACK
SETUP
CH/ PAGE
ENTER
3
1
1 2 3 4
2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER0+10
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS TUV
ABC. /
DEF
SLEEP
WXYZ
MAIN
DEV. TV AVR
POWER
TUNER
AVR
GAME
CBL /
SAT
Blu-ray
DVD
AUX1
AUX2
NETWORK
INTERNET
RADIO
iPod/
USB
MENU
MEDIA
PLAYER
CD
INPUT
TVDEVICE
MENU
PHONO
TV
AUDIO
VOLUME
MUTE
2
ZONE2
ZONE3
VOLUME
df
POWER
X
MUTE
:
Input source
select buttons
1
Press ZONE2 or ZONE3 to switch the zone mode.
•ZONE2 or ZONE3 lights.
2
Press POWER X to turn on the ZONE2 or ZONE3 power.
•Also press input source select button when in standby mode, the
power turns on.
•When POWER X is pressed, ZONE2 or ZONE3 turns o.
•Power in ZONE2 or ZONE3 can be turned on or o by pressing
ZONE2 ON/OFF or ZONE3 ON/OFF on the main unit.
3
Press the input source select button to select the input
source to be played.
The audio signal of the selected source is output to ZONE2 or
ZONE3.
•To perform an operation with the main unit, press ZONE2 SOURCE
or ZONE3 SOURCE.
Each time you press ZONE2 SOURCE or ZONE3 SOURCE, the
input source changes.
2 Adjusting the volume
Use VOLUME df to adjust the volume.
•At time of purchase, “Volume Limit” (vpage 194) is set to “70
(–10dB)”.
%
•Turn MASTER VOLUME after pressing ZONE2 SOURCE or ZONE3 SOURCE
on the main unit to adjust the sound volume.
139
Appendix
TipsSettingsConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Playback
2 Turning o the sound temporarily
Press MUTE :.
The sound is reduced to the level set at “Mute Level” (vpage195)
in the menu.
•To cancel, either adjust the volume or press MUTE : again.
•You can also adjust the volume level to cancel the muting.
%
•You can adjust the tone and volume for ZONE2 or ZONE3 in “ZONE2 Setup”
or “ZONE3 Setup” (vpage193) in the menu.
140
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Settings
Menu map
For menu operation, connect a TV to this unit and display the menu on the TV screen. For menu operations, see the following page.
By default, this unit has recommended settings defined. You can customize this unit based on your existing system and your preferences.
2 Audio
Setting items Description Page
Dialog Level Sets the output level to clarify the dialogue output from the center channel.
150
Subwoofer Level This setting adjusts the volume level for the subwoofer.
150
Subwoofer Turn subwoofer output on and o.
150
Subwoofer 1 Level This setting adjusts the volume level for the subwoofer 1.
150
Subwoofer 2 Level This setting adjusts the volume level for the subwoofer 2.
150
Surround Parameter Adjusts surround sound parameters.
151
Cinema EQ Gently softens the upper treble range of movie soundtracks to reduce possible harshness and improve clarity.
151
Loudness Management This sets whether to output as specified in “Dynamic Compression” or output directly without compressing the dynamic
range of audio recorded in the disc.
151
Dynamic Compression Compress dynamic range (dierence between loud and soft sounds).
151
Low Frequency Eects Adjust the low frequency eects level (LFE).
152
Center Gain Distributes the dialogue output from the center channel to the front left and right channels and widens the sound image in
the front.
152
Panorama Assign front L/R signals to also go to the surround channels for wider sound.
152
Dimension Shift sound image center to front or rear to adjust playback balance.
152
Center Width Distributes the dialogue output from the center channel to left and right channels and widens the sound image in the front.
153
Delay Time Adjust the audio delay time against video to extend the sound field image.
153
Eect Level Adjust the sound eect level of the current sound mode.
153
Room Size Determine size of acoustic environment.
153
Height Gain Control the front height channel volume.
153
Speaker Select Makes settings for the speakers outputting sound.
154
141
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Setting items Description Page
Tone Adjusts the tonal quality of the sound.
154
Tone Control Set the tone control function to “On” and “O”.
154
Bass Adjust bass.
154
Treble Adjust treble.
154
Restorer Expands the low and high frequency components of compressed audio content such as MP3 files to enable richer audio
playback.
155
Audio Delay Compensates for incorrect timing between video and audio.
155
Volume Set the MAIN ZONE (room where the unit is located) volume setting.
155
Scale Set how volume is displayed.
155
Limit Make a setting for maximum volume.
156
Power On Level Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.
156
Mute Level Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.
156
Audyssey Makes Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume®, Audyssey LFC™ and Audyssey DSX®
settings.
156
MultEQ
®
XT32 MultEQ® XT32 compensates for both time and frequency characteristics of the listening area based on Audyssey® Setup
measurement results.
156
Dynamic EQ Solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception and room
acoustics. Works with MultEQ® XT32.
157
Reference Level Oset Audyssey Dynamic EQ® is referenced to the standard film mix level.
157
Dynamic Volume Solves the problem of large variations in volume level between TV, movies and other content (between quiet passages and
loud passages, etc.) by automatically adjusting to the user’s preferred volume setting.
158
Audyssey LFC™ Adjusts the low frequency band to prevent bass and vibration from being conveyed to neighboring rooms.
158
Containment Amount Adjusts the amount of low frequency containment. Use higher settings if you have close neighbors.
158
Audyssey DSX
®
Provides more immersive surround sound by adding the new channels.
159
Stage Width Adjust sound stage width when using front wide speakers.
159
Stage Height Adjust sound stage height when using front height speakers.
159
142
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
2 Video
Setting items Description Page
Picture Adjust Adjusts the video quality.
161
Picture Mode Select the desired picture mode according to the video content and your viewing environment.
161
Contrast Adjust picture contrast.
161
Brightness Adjust picture brightness.
161
Saturation Adjust picture chroma level (color saturation).
161
Hue Adjust green and red balance. Also called Tint.
161
Noise Reduction Reduce overall video noise.
162
Enhancer Emphasize picture sharpness.
162
HDMI Setup Makes settings for HDMI video/audio output.
162
Auto Lip Sync Make automatic compensation for timing shift in audio and video output.
162
HDMI Audio Out Select HDMI audio output device.
163
Video Output Selects which HDMI outputs to use.
163
HDMI Pass Through Selects how the AV receiver will pass HDMI signals to the HDMI output in standby power mode.
163
HDMI Control You can link operations with devices connected to HDMI and compatible with HDMI Control.
163
Pass Through Source The AV receiver will “pass through” the sources HDMI signal when in standby.
164
Power O Control Links the power standby of this unit to external devices.
164
Component Video Out Sets whether to use the component video output connector for MAIN ZONE or ZONE2.
164
Setting items Description Page
Graphic EQ Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker.
160
Speaker Selection Select whether to adjust tones for individual speakers or for all speakers.
160
Adjust EQ Adjust tonal balance for each frequency band. Adjust the speaker selected in “Speaker Selection”.
160
Curve Copy Copy “Audyssey Flat”curve from MultEQ® XT32.
160
143
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Setting items Description Page
Output Settings Makes screen-related settings.
165
Video Mode Make settings for video processing.
165
Video Conversion The input video signal is converted automatically in conjunction with the connected TV.
165
i/p Scaler Convert the input source resolution to the resolution set.
165
Resolution Set the output resolution.
166
Progressive Mode Set an appropriate progressive conversion mode for the source video signal.
166
Aspect Ratio Set the aspect ratio for the video signals output to the HDMI.
166
On Screen Display Select the on-screen display user interface preferences.
167
Volume Sets where to display the master volume level.
167
Info Displays status of operation temporarily when the sound mode is changed, or input source is switched.
167
Now Playing Sets how long each menu is displayed when the input source is “NETWORK”, “iPod/USB”, or “HD Radio”.
167
TV Format Set the video output signal format for the TV you are using.
167
2 Inputs
Setting items Description Page
Input Assign Changes input connector assignment.
168
Source Rename Changes the display name for this source.
170
Hide Sources Remove from the display input sources that are not used.
170
Source Level Adjusts the playback level of the audio input.
170
Input Select Sets the audio input mode and decode mode.
171
Input Mode Set the audio input modes for the dierent input sources.
171
Decode Mode Set the audio decode mode for input source.
171
144
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
2 Speakers
Setting items Description Page
Audyssey
®
Setup The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and listening room are measured and the optimum settings are made
automatically.
172
Manual Setup Perform when setting the speakers manually or when changing settings made in Audyssey® Setup.
181
Amp Assign Select power amplifier usage method to match your speaker system.
181
Speaker Config. Indicate speaker presence and select speaker size categories based on bass reproduction capability.
182
Distances Set distance from listening position to speakers.
184
Levels Set the volume of the test tone to be the same when it is output from each speaker.
185
Crossovers Set the maximum frequency of the bass signal output from each channel to the subwoofer.
185
Bass Set subwoofer and LFE signal range playback.
186
Front Speaker Setup Set the front speakers to use for every sound mode.
187
2ch Playback Select the method for setting the speakers used in the 2-channel direct and stereo playback modes.
187
2 Network
Setting items Description Page
Information Display network information.
189
IP Control Enables network communication in standby power mode.
189
Friendly Name The Friendly Name is the name of this unit displayed on the network. You can change the Friendly Name according to your
preferences.
189
Settings Make settings for wired LAN.
190
Diagnostics Used to check the network connection.
191
Maintenance Mode Use when receiving maintenance from a Denon service engineer or custom installer.
192
145
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
2 General
Setting items Description Page
Language Sets the language for display the menu on the TV screen.
193
ZONE2 Setup / ZONE3 Setup Makes settings for audio playback with multi-zone (ZONE2, ZONE3).
193
Bass Adjust bass tones.
193
Treble Adjust treble tones.
193
High Pass Filter Make settings for cutting the low range to reduce distortion in the bass.
193
Lch Level Adjust the left channel output level.
194
Rch Level Adjust the right channel output level.
194
Channel Set the signal output from multi-zone.
194
HDMI Audio (ZONE2 only) Selects the audio signal format for playing an HDMI source in ZONE2.
194
Volume Level Set the volume output level.
194
Volume Limit Make a setting for maximum volume.
194
Power On Volume Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.
194
Mute Level Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.
195
Zone Rename Change the display title of each zone to one you prefer.
195
Quick Select Names Change the “Quick Select” display title to one you prefer.
195
Trigger Out 1 / Trigger Out 2 Selects when to activate trigger out.
195
Auto Standby When you do not perform any operation on this unit with no audio or video input for a specified time, this unit automatically
enters the standby mode. Before it enters the standby mode, “Auto Standby” is displayed on the display of this unit and the
menu screen.
196
Front Display Makes settings related to the display on this unit.
196
146
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Setting items Description Page
Information Show information about receiver settings, input signals, etc.
197
Audio Shows information about audio input signals.
197
Video Shows information about video input signal and HDMI Monitor.
197
ZONE Shows information about each zone.
197
Firmware Displays system information.
197
Notifications Selects notification message preferences.
198
Usage Data Selects whether or not to send anonymous usage data to Denon.
198
Firmware Set whether or not to check for firmware update, update the firmware, and display update and upgrade notifications.
199
Update Update the firmware of the receiver.
199
Notifications Displays a notification message on this unit’s menu screen when the latest firmware is released with “Update”.
199
Add New Feature Display new features that can be downloaded to this unit and perform an upgrade.
200
Setup Lock Protect settings from inadvertent changes.
201
2 Setup Assistant
Setting items Description Page
Begin Setup Perform basic installation/connections/settings from the beginning according to the guidance indicated on the TV screen.
C 7
Language Select Perform settings item by item according to the guidance indicated on the TV screen.
Speaker Setup
Speaker Calibration
Network Setup
Input Setup
147
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Menu operation
1
Press MAIN to switch the zone mode.
MAIN lights.
2
Press SETUP.
The menu is displayed on the TV screen.
3
Use uio p to select the menu to be set or operated,
then press ENTER.
4
Use o p to change to desired setting.
5
Press ENTER to enter the setting.
•To return to the previous item, press BACK.
•Exiting the Menu, press SETUP while the menu is displayed.
The menu display disappears.
InstaPrevue
TUNER
AVR
SOUND MODE
RC-1185
MUTE
POWERZONE SELECT
FAVORITE STATION
TUNE TUNE
PUREMOVIE GAME
MUSIC
GAME
CBL /
SAT
Blu-ray
DVD
AUX1
AUX2
NETWORK
INTERNET
RADIO
iPod/
USB
VOLUME
OPTIONINFO
SETUP
CH/ PAGE
MENU
2 3
1
1 2 3 4
2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER0+10
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS TUV
ABC. /
DEF
WXYZ
MEDIA
PLAYER
CD
INPUT
TVDEVICE
MENU
PHONO
DEV. TV AVR
TV
AUDIO
MAIN
BACK
ENTER
SLEEP
uio
p
ENTER
BACK
SETUP
MAIN
148
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Inputting characters
•On this unit, you can change the name displayed on the following screens to the names that you prefer.
•Preset Name (vpage70)
•Text Search (vpage107)
•Source Rename (vpage170)
•Friendly Name (vpage189)
•Zone Rename (vpage195)
•Quick Select Names (vpage195)
•Character input for the network functions (vpage74, 81, 85, 92, 95, 190)
•There are two methods for inputting characters; select a character on the TV screen to input characters. Multiple characters are assigned to a button,
and each time the button is pressed, a character is switched.
•Using the keyboard screen (vpage149)
•Using the number buttons (vpage149)
149
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Using the number buttons
1
When the keyboard screen is displayed, press 0 – 9.
The 10 key input screen is displayed.
2
Place the cursor at the character to be changed with o
p and press the number button (0 – 9) until the desired
character is displayed.
•The types of characters that can be input are as shown below.
1 . @ - _ / : ˜ M N O m n o 6
A B C a b c 2 P Q R S p q r s 7
D E F d e f 3 T U V t u v 8
G H I g h i 4 W X Y Z w x y z 9
J K L j k l 5
0 (Space) ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) z + ,
; < = > ? [ \ ] ^ ` { | }
3
Repeat step 2 to change the name then press ENTER to
register it.
Using the keyboard screen
1
Display the screen for inputting characters.
GExampleH Source Rename screen
Inputs/Source Rename
Change the display name for this source
CBL/SAT
A
N
0
$
B
O
1
%
C
P
2
&
D
Q
3
‘
E
R
4
(
F
S
5
)
G
T
6
*
H
U
7
+
I
V
8
,
J
W
9
;
K
X
!
<
L
Y
“
=
M
Z
#
>
CBL/SAT
Clear Insert Delete
a/A Space Cancel O K
2
Select a character to be changed.
q Use uio p to select “,” or “.”.
w Press ENTER to place the cursor at the character to
be changed.
Each time ENTER is pressed, the cursor moves by one character.
3
Select a character to be input with uio p then press
ENTER.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to change the name.
5
Use uio p to select “OK”, then press ENTER.
150
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Audio
Make audio-related settings.
Dialog Level
Sets the output level to clarify the dialogue output from the center channel.
2 Level
–12.0dB – +12.0dB (Default : 0.0dB)
Subwoofer Level
This setting adjusts the volume level for the subwoofer.
2 Subwoofer
Turn subwoofer output on and o.
On (Default) : The subwoofer is used.
O : The subwoofer is not used.
%
•This can be set when the sound mode is “DIRECT” and the “Subwoofer
Mode” (vpage186) is “LFE+Main”.
2 Subwoofer 1 Level
This setting adjusts the volume level for the subwoofer 1.
–12.0dB – +12.0dB (Default : 0.0dB)
2 Subwoofer 2 Level
This setting adjusts the volume level for the subwoofer 2.
–12.0dB – +12.0dB (Default : 0.0dB)
151
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Surround Parameter
You can adjust the surround audio sound field eects to match your
preferences.
The items (parameters) that can be adjusted depend on the signal
being input and the currently set sound mode. For details on the
adjustable parameters, see “Sound modes and surround parameters”
(vpage235).
%
•Some setting items cannot be set while playback is stopped. Make the settings
during playback.
2 Cinema EQ
Gently softens the upper treble range of movie soundtracks to reduce
possible harshness and improve clarity.
On : “Cinema EQ” is used.
O (Default) : “Cinema EQ” is not used.
2 Loudness Management
This sets whether to output as specified in “Dynamic Compression”
or output directly without compressing the dynamic range of audio
recorded in the disc.
On (Default) : Outputs using the settings made in “Dynamic
Compression” and “Dialogue normalization function”
(vpage197) are enabled.
O : “Dynamic Compression” settings and “Dialogue Normalization”
are disabled, and the signals on the disk are output as is.
%
•This can be set in the Dolby TrueHD mode.
2 Dynamic Compression
Compress dynamic range (dierence between loud and soft sounds).
Auto (Default) : Automatic dynamic range compression on/o control
according to source.
Low / Medium / High : These set the compression level.
O : Dynamic range compression is always o.
%
•You can set “Auto” only for the Dolby TrueHD source.
152
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
2 Low Frequency Eects
Adjust the low-frequency eects level (LFE).
–10dB – 0dB (Default)
%
•For proper playback of the dierent sources, we recommend setting to the
values below.
•Dolby Digital sources : 0dB
•DTS movie sources : 0dB
•DTS music sources : –10dB
2 Center Gain
Distributes the dialogue output from the center channel to the front left
and right channels and widens the sound image in the front.
0.0 – 1.0
%
•You can set this when the sound mode is set to DTS NEO:X.
•The smaller the value, the more dialogue is concentrated on the center
channel. The larger the value, the more dialogue is distributed to front left and
right channels, and the more the sound image widens in the front.
2 Panorama
Assign front L/R signals to also go to the surround channels for wider
sound.
On : Set.
O (Default) : Do not set.
%
•You can set this when the sound mode is Dolby PLg/gx in the “Music” mode.
2 Dimension
Shift sound image center to front or rear to adjust playback balance.
0 – 6 (Default : 3)
%
•You can set this when the sound mode is Dolby PLg/gx in the “Music” mode.
•As you set a smaller number, the surround sound field shifts backward; as you
set a larger number, the surround sound field shifts forward.
153
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
2 Center Width
Distributes the dialogue output from the center channel to left and right
channels and widens the sound image in the front.
0 – 7 (Default : 3)
%
•You can set this when the sound mode is Dolby PLg/gx in the “Music” mode.
•The smaller the value, the more dialogue is concentrated on the center
channel. The larger the value, the more dialogue is distributed to front left and
right channels, and the more the sound image widens in the front.
2 Delay Time
Adjust the audio delay time against video to extend the sound field
image.
0ms – 300ms (Default : 30ms)
%
•You can set this when the sound mode is “MATRIX”.
2 Eect Level
Adjust the sound eect level of the current sound mode.
1 – 15 (Default : 10)
%
•Set to a lower level if the positioning and sense of phase of the surround
signals seems unnatural.
2 Room Size
Determine size of acoustic environment. You can set this when the
sound mode is one of the original sound modes.
Small : Simulate acoustics of a small room.
Medium small : Simulate acoustics of a medium-small room.
Medium (Default) : Simulate acoustics of a medium room.
Medium large : Simulate acoustics of a medium-large room.
Large : Simulate acoustics of a large room.
%
•“Room Size” does not indicate the size of the room in which sources are
played.
2 Height Gain
Control the front height channel volume.
Low : Reduce the front height channel volume.
Normal (Default) : Front height channel sound is output with standard
sound volume.
High : Increase the front height channel volume.
%
•You can set this in the “PLgz” sound mode or when using the PLgz decoder.
154
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
2 Speaker Select
Makes settings for the speakers outputting sound.
Surround Back : Sound is output from the surround back speakers.
Height : Sound is output from the front height speakers.
Wide : Sound is output from the front wide speakers.
Back/Height : Sound is output from the surround back and front height
speakers.
Back/Wide : Sound is output from the surround back and front wide
speakers.
Height/Wide : Sound is output from the front height and front wide
speakers.
%
•This can be set when “Assign Mode” (vpage181) is set to “7.1ch (SB/FH/
FW)” or “9.1ch (SB/FH/FW)”.
•The speakers that can be selected by the “Main Pre-amps” setting are
changed when “Assign Mode” (vpage181) is set to “9.1ch (SB/FH/FW)”.
2 Set Defaults
The “Surround Parameter” settings are returned to the default settings.
Tone
Adjust the tonal quality of the sound.
2 Tone Control
Set the tone control function to “On” and “O”.
On : Allow tone adjustment (bass, treble).
O : Playback without tone adjustment.
2 Bass
Adjust bass.
–6dB – +6dB
2 Treble
Adjust treble.
–6dB – +6dB
%
•This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to “DIRECT” or “PURE
DIRECT”.
155
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Restorer
Compressed audio formats such as MP3, WMA (Windows Media Audio)
and MPEG-4 AAC reduce the amount of data by eliminating signal
components that are hard for the human ear to hear. The “Restorer”
function generates the signals eliminated upon compression, restoring the
sound to conditions near those of the original sound before compression.
It also restores the original bass characteristics for a rich and expanded
tonal range.
2 Mode
High : Optimized mode for compressed sources with very weak highs
(64 kbps and under).
Medium : Apply suitable bass and treble boost for all compressed
sources (96 kbps and under).
Low : Optimized mode for compressed sources with normal highs (96
kbps and over).
O : Do not use “Restorer”.
%
•This item can be set with analog signals or PCM signal (Sample Rate =
44.1/48 kHz) is input.
•“Restorer” settings are stored for each input source.
•This item default setting for “NETWORK” and “iPod/USB” is “Low”. All
others are set to “O”.
•This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to “DIRECT” or “PURE
DIRECT”.
Audio Delay
While viewing video, manually adjust the time to delay audio output so
that the video and audio are synchronized.
0ms (Default) – 200ms
%
•This item can be set within the range of 0 to 100 ms when “Auto Lip Sync”
(vpage162) is set to “On” and when a TV compatible with Auto Lip Sync is
connected.
•Store “Audio Delay” for each input source.
•Audio Delay for game mode can be set when “Video Mode” (vpage165) is set
to “Auto” or “Game”.
Volume
Set the MAIN ZONE (room where the unit is located) volume setting.
2 Scale
Set how volume is displayed.
0 – 98 (Default) : Display in the range 0 (Min) to 98.
–79.5dB – 18.0dB : Display ---dB (Min), in the range –79.5 dB to 18.0
dB.
%
•The “Scale” setting applies to all zones.
156
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
2 Limit
Make a setting for maximum volume.
60 (–20dB) / 70 (–10dB) / 80 (0dB)
O (Default)
2 Power On Level
Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.
Last (Default) : Use the memorized setting from the last session.
Mute : Always use the muting on condition when power is turned on.
1 – 98 (–79dB – 18dB) : The volume is adjusted to the set level.
2 Mute Level
Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.
Full (Default) : The sound is muted entirely.
–40dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down.
–20dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.
Audyssey
Set Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic
Volume®, Audyssey LFC™ and Audyssey DSX®. These can be selected
after Audyssey® Setup has been performed. For additional information on
Audyssey technology, please see page241.
%
•“MultEQ® XT32”, “Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” settings are stored for
each input source.
•“MultEQ® XT32”, “Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” cannot be set when the
sound mode is set to “DIRECT” or “PURE DIRECT”.
2 MultEQ
®
XT32
MultEQ® XT32 compensates for both time and frequency characteristics
of the listening area based on Audyssey® Setup measurement results.
Selection is done from three types of compensation curves. We
recommend the “Audyssey” setting.
Audyssey (Default) : Optimize the frequency response of all speakers.
Audyssey Byp.L/R : Optimize frequency response of speakers except
front L and R speakers.
Audyssey Flat : Optimize frequency response of all speakers to flat
response.
Graphic EQ : Apply frequency response set with “Graphic EQ”
(vpage160).
O : Turn “MultEQ® XT32” equalizer o.
%
•When using headphones, “MultEQ® XT32” is automatically set to “O”.
157
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
2 Dynamic EQ
Solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is
decreased by taking into account human perception and room
acoustics. Works with MultEQ® XT32.
On (Default) : Use Dynamic EQ.
O : Do not use Dynamic EQ.
%
•When the menu “Dynamic EQ” setting is “On”, it is not possible to do “Tone
Control” (vpage154) adjustment.
2 Reference Level Oset
Audyssey Dynamic EQ® is referenced to the standard film mix level. It
makes adjustments to maintain the reference response and surround
envelopment when the volume is turned down from 0 dB. However,
film reference level is not always used in music or other non-film
content. Dynamic EQ Reference Level Oset provides three osets
from the film level reference (5 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB) that can be
selected when the mix level of the content is not within the standard.
Recommended setting levels are shown at below.
0dB (Film Ref) (Default) : This is the default setting and should be used
when listening to movies.
5dB : Select this setting for content that has a very wide dynamic
range, such as classical music.
10dB : Select this setting for jazz or other music that has a wider
dynamic range. This setting should also be selected for TV
content as that is usually mixed at 10 dB below film reference.
15dB : Select this setting for pop/rock music or other program material
that is mixed at very high listening levels and has a compressed
dynamic range.
%
•Setting is enabled when “Dynamic EQ” (vpage157) is “On”.
158
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
2 Dynamic Volume
Solves the problem of large variations in volume level between TV,
movies and other content (between quiet passages and loud passages,
etc.) by automatically adjusting to the user’s preferred volume setting.
Heavy : Most adjustment to softest and loudest sounds.
Medium : Medium adjustment to loudest and softest sound.
Light : Least adjustment to loudest and softest sounds.
O (Default) : Do not use “Dynamic Volume”.
%
•If “Dynamic Volume” is set to “Yes” in “Audyssey® Setup” (vpage172),
the setting is automatically changed to “Medium”.
2 Audyssey LFC™
Adjusts the low frequency band to prevent bass and vibration from
being conveyed to neighboring rooms.
On : Use “Audyssey LFC™”.
O (Default) : Do not use “Audyssey LFC™”.
%
•“Audyssey LFC™” cannot be set up if “Audyssey® Setup” is not completed.
About Audyssey LFC™ (Low Frequency Containment)
Audyssey LFC™ solves the problem of low frequency sounds
disturbing people in neighboring rooms or apartments. Audyssey
LFC™ dynamically monitors the audio content and removes the
low frequencies that pass through walls, floors and ceilings. It then
applies psychoacoustic processing to restore the perception of low
bass for listeners in the room. The result is great sound that no longer
disturbs the neighbors.
2 Containment Amount
Adjusts the amount of low frequency containment. Use higher settings
if you have close neighbors.
1 – 7 (Default : 4)
%
•Setting is enabled when “Audyssey LFC™” is “On”.
159
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
2 Audyssey DSX
®
Provides more immersive surround sound by adding the new channels.
Wides : Turn on Audyssey DSX® processing for wide expansion.
Heights : Turn on Audyssey DSX® processing for height expansion.
Wides/Heights : Turns on Audyssey DSX® processing for wide and
height expansion.
O (Default) : Do not set Audyssey DSX®.
%
•“Audyssey DSX®” can be set when you are using front height speakers or
front wide speakers.
•“Wides/Heights” can only be set when the “Assign Mode” (vpage181)
setting is other than “9.1ch (SB/FH/FW)” and the “Main pre-amps”
(vpage182) setting is other than “Surround Back”.
•“Audyssey DSX®” is only valid when using a center speaker.
•“Audyssey DSX®” is valid when sound mode is DOLBY sound mode or DTS
sound mode other than PLgz Height and DTS NEO:X.
•“Audyssey DSX®” cannot be configured if the HD Audio source being played
includes Front height and Front wide channels. In this case, the respective
channels are played back using the input signals.
About Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion (A-DSX)
Audyssey DSX® is a scalable system that adds new speakers to
improve surround impression. Starting with a 5.1 system Audyssey
DSX® first adds Wide channels for the biggest impact on envelopment.
Research in human hearing has proven that information from the
Wide channels is much more critical in the presentation of a realistic
soundstage than the Back Surround channels found in traditional 7.1
systems. Audyssey DSX® then creates a pair of Height channels to
reproduce the next most important acoustical and perceptual cues.
In addition to these new Wide and Height channels, Audyssey DSX®
applies Surround Envelopment Processing to enhance the blend
between the front and surround channels.
2 Stage Width
Adjust sound stage width when using front wide speakers.
–10 – +10 (Default : 0)
2 Stage Height
Adjust sound stage height when using front height speakers.
–10 – +10 (Default : 0)
160
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Graphic EQ
Use the 9 band graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker.
%
•“Graphic EQ” can be set when “MultEQ® XT32” (vpage 156) setting is
“Graphic EQ”.
•Speakers for which “Graphic EQ” can be set dier according to the sound mode.
2 Speaker Selection
Select whether to adjust tones for individual speakers or for all
speakers.
All
Left/Right (Default)
Each
2 Adjust EQ
Adjust tonal balance for each frequency band. Adjust the speaker
selected in “Speaker Selection”.
q Select the speaker.
w Select the adjustment frequency band.
63Hz / 125Hz / 250Hz / 500Hz / 1kHz / 2kHz / 4kHz / 8kHz / 16kHz
e Adjust the level.
–20.0dB – +6.0dB (Default : 0.0dB)
2 Curve Copy
Copy “Audyssey Flat” curve from “MultEQ® XT32” (vpage156).
%
•“Curve Copy” is displayed after Audyssey® Setup has been performed.
2 Set Defaults
The “Graphic EQ” settings are returned to the default settings.
161
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Video
Make video-related settings.
Picture Adjust
Picture quality can be adjusted.
%
•Can be set when the “Video Conversion” (vpage165) setting is “On”.
•Can be set when “HDMI”, “COMP” or “VIDEO” (vpage 169) is assigned for
each input source.
2 Picture Mode
Select the desired picture mode according to the video content and
your viewing environment.
Standard : The standard mode suited for most living room viewing
environments.
Movie : A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room such as a
theater room.
Vivid : A mode that makes graphic images for games, etc. brighter
and more vivid.
Streaming : A mode suited for low bit rate video sources.
Custom : Adjusts the picture quality manually.
O : No picture quality adjustment is done with this unit.
%
•You can also press OPTION to make these settings from “Picture Mode”
(vpage110) in the option menu.
•The default settings are as follows.
•For “NETWORK” and “iPod/USB” input sources : Streaming
•For input sources other than “Network” and “iPod/USB” : O
2 Contrast
Adjust picture contrast.
–6 – +6 (Default : 0)
2 Brightness
Adjust picture brightness.
0 (Default) – +12
2 Saturation
Adjust picture chroma level (color saturation).
–6 – +6 (Default : 0)
2 Hue
Adjust green and red balance. Also called Tint.
–6 – +6 (Default : 0)
162
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
2 Noise Reduction
Reduce overall video noise.
Low / Medium / High / O (Default)
2 Enhancer
Emphasize picture sharpness.
0 (Default) – +12
%
•“Contrast”, “Brightness”, “Saturation”, “Hue”, “Noise Reduction” and
“Enhancer” can be set when “Picture Mode” is set to “Custom”.
•“Picture Adjust” cannot be set when 4K signals are input.
HDMI Setup
Make settings for HDMI video/audio output.
NOTE
•When “HDMI Pass Through” and “HDMI Control” is set to “On”, it consumes
more standby power. If you are not using this unit for an extended period, it is
recommended that you unplug the power cord from the power outlet.
2 Auto Lip Sync
Make automatic compensation for timing shift in audio and video
output.
On (Default) : Compensated.
O : Not compensated.
2 HDMI Audio Out
Select HDMI audio output device.
AVR (Default) : Play back through speakers connected to the unit.
TV : Play back through TV connected to the unit.
%
•When the HDMI control function is activated, priority is given to the TV audio
setting (vpage125 “HDMI control function”).
•When the power of this unit is on and “HDMI Audio Out” is set to “TV”,
audio is output as 2-channel from the HDMI OUT connector.
163
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
2 Video Output
Selects which HDMI outputs to use.
Auto(Dual) (Default) : The presence of a TV connected to the HDMI
MONITOR 1 or HDMI MONITOR 2 connector is
detected automatically, and that TV connection
is used.
Monitor 1 : A TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR 1 connector is
always used.
Monitor 2 : A TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR 2 connector is
always used.
%
•If both the HDMI MONITOR 1 and HDMI MONITOR 2 connectors are
connected and “Resolution” (vpage166) is set to “Auto”, the signals are
output with a resolution compatible with both TV.
•With “Resolution” (vpage166) not set to “Auto”, check whether the
TV you are using is compatible with the resolution under “Video” – “HDMI
Monitor 1” or “HDMI Monitor 2” (vpage197).
2 HDMI Pass Through
Selects how the AV receiver will pass HDMI signals to the HDMI
output in standby power mode.
On (Default) : Passes the selected HDMI input through the AV
receiver’s HDMI output when the AV receiver is in
standby power mode.
O : No HDMI signals are passed through the AV receiver’s HDMI
output in standby power mode.
2 HDMI Control
You can link operations with devices connected to HDMI and
compatible with HDMI Control.
On : Use HDMI control function.
O (Default) : Do not use HDMI control function.
%
•Please consult the operating instructions for each connected device to check
the settings.
•Refer to “HDMI control function” (vpage125) for more information about
the HDMI control function.
NOTE
•If the “HDMI Control” settings have been changed, always reset the power
to connected devices after the change.
164
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
2 Pass Through Source
The AV receiver will “pass through” the sources HDMI signal when
in standby.
Last : Choose this option to “pass through” the last used HDMI input
video source.
CBL/SAT (Default) / DVD / Blu-ray / GAME / AUX1 / AUX2 / MEDIA
PLAYER / CD
z
: Choose one of these HDMI sources to be passed
through when the AV receiver is in standby.
z “Pass Through Source” can be set when any of the HDMI connectors is
assigned to “CD” for the input source in the “Input Assign” (vpage168)
setting.
%
•“Pass Through Source” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “On” or
“HDMI Pass Through” is set to “On”.
2 Power O Control
Links the power standby of this unit to external devices.
All (Default) : If power to a connected TV is turned o independently
of the input source, power to this unit is automatically
set to standby.
Video : With an input source being selected that is assigned either
“HDMI”, “COMP” or “VIDEO” (vpage 169), when you
turn the power of the TV o, power to this unit is automatically
set to standby.
O : This unit does not link with power to a TV.
Component Video Out
Set the zone to which the component video output connector is assigned.
MAIN ZONE (Default) : Assigns the component video output connector
to MAIN ZONE.
ZONE2 : Assigns the component video output connector to ZONE2.
165
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Output Settings
Makes screen-related settings.
%
•Can be set when each input source is assigned “HDMI”, “COMP” or “VIDEO”
(vpage169).
•“Resolution”, “Progressive Mode” and “Aspect Ratio” can be set when “i/p
Scaler” is set to anything other than “O”.
•“Output Settings” can not be set when 4K signals are input.
2 Video Mode
Make settings for video processing.
Auto (Default) : Process video automatically based on the HDMI
content information.
Game : Always process video for game content.
Movie : Always process video for movie content.
%
•If “Video Mode” is set to “Auto”, the mode is switched according to the
input contents.
2 Video Conversion
The input video signal is converted automatically in conjunction with
the connected TV (vpage229 “Video conversion function”).
On (Default) : The input video signal is converted.
O : The input video signal is not converted.
2 i/p Scaler
Convert the input source resolution to the resolution set.
n When the input source is set other than to “iPod/USB” and
“NETWORK”
Analog (Default) : Use i/p (interlace-to-progressive) scaler function for
analog video signals.
HDMI : Use i/p scaler function for HDMI video signals.
O : Do not use i/p scaler function.
n When the input source is set to “iPod/USB” and “NETWORK”
On (Default) : Use i/p scaler function.
O : Do not use i/p scaler function.
%
•“Analog & HDMI” can be set for input sources for which an HDMI input
connector is assigned.
•Which items can be set depend on the input source assigned to each input
connector.
•This function is not eective when the input signal is “x.v.Color”, 3D, sYCC
601 color, Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC 601 color or computer resolutions.
166
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
2 Resolution
Set the output resolution.
You can set “Resolution” separately for HDMI output of the analog
video input and HDMI input.
Auto (Default) : The number of pixels the TV connected to the HDMI
MONITOR OUT connector supports is detected
automatically and the appropriate output resolution is
set.
480p/576p / 1080i / 720p / 1080p / 1080p:24Hz / 4K :
Set the output resolution.
%
•When “i/p Scaler” is set to “Analog & HDMI”, the resolution of both the
analog video input signal and HDMI input signal can be set.
•When set to “1080p:24Hz”, you can enjoy film-like pictures for film sources
(in 24 Hz). For video sources and mixed sources, we recommend setting the
resolution to “1080p”.
•It is not possible to convert a 50 Hz signal into 1080p/24Hz. It is output at a
resolution of 1080p/50Hz.
2 Progressive Mode
Set an appropriate progressive conversion mode for the source video
signal.
Auto (Default) : The video signal is automatically detected and the
appropriate mode is set.
Video : Select mode suitable for video playback.
Video and Film : Select mode suitable for video and 30-frame film
material playback.
%
•This item can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “O”.
2 Aspect Ratio
Set the aspect ratio for the video signals output to the HDMI.
16:9 (Default) : Output at 16:9 aspect ratio.
4:3 : Output at 4:3 aspect ratio with black bars on the sides of a 16:9 TV
screen (except for 480p/576p output).
%
•“Aspect Ratio” can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than
“O”.
167
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
On Screen Display
Select the on-screen display user interface preferences.
2 Volume
Sets where to display the master volume level.
Bottom (Default) : Display at the bottom.
Top : Display at the top.
O : Turn display o.
%
•When the master volume display is hard to see when superimposed text
(closed captioning) or movie subtitles are present, set to “Top”.
2 Info
Displays status of operation temporarily when the sound mode is
changed, or input source is switched. You can set whether or not to
show each of these status displays.
On (Default) : Turn display on.
O : Turn display o.
2 Now Playing
Sets how long each menu is displayed when the input source is
“NETWORK”, “iPod/USB”, or “HD Radio”.
Always On (Default) : Show display continuously.
Auto O : Show display for 30 seconds after operation.
TV Format
Set the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using.
2 Format
NTSC (Default) : Select NTSC output.
PAL : Select PAL output.
%
•“Format” can also be set by the following procedure. However, the menu
screen is not displayed.
1. Press and hold the main unit’s
o p for at least 3 seconds.
“zVideo Format <NTSC>” appears on the display.
2. Use the main unit’s
o p and set the video signal format.
3. Press the main unit’s ENTER to complete the setting.
NOTE
•When a format other than the video format of the connected TV is set, the
picture will not be displayed properly.
168
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Inputs
Perform settings related to input source playback.
You do not have to change the settings to use the unit. Make settings when needed.
Input Assign
By making connections as indicated by the input sources printed on the
audio/video input connectors of this unit, you can just press one of the
input source select buttons to easily play back audio or video from a
connected device.
When making connections other than the default settings, you must
change settings in this section.
2 Examples of “Input Assign” menu screen
displays
Use the “Input Assign” menu to change the HDMI input connectors,
Digital input connectors, Analog input connectors, Component input
connectors, and Video input connectors that are assigned to the input
sources in default settings.
DIGITAL ANALOGHDMI COMP VIDEO
Inputs/Input Assign
Set Defaults
CBL/SAT
DVD
Blu-ray
GAME
MEDIA PLAYER
TV AUDIO
AUX1
AUX2
1
2
3
4
5
-
FRONT
6
1
2
3
-
4
-
FRONT
-
1
2
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
2
-
-
3
-
FRONT
-
COAX1
COAX2
D.LINK
-
-
OPT1
-
-
CD - 5 - -
OPT2
Changes HDMI input assignments
%
•By default, each item is set as follows.
Input source HDMI DIGITAL ANALOG COMP VIDEO
CBL/SAT 1 COAX1 1 1 1
DVD 2 COAX2 2 2 2
Blu-ray 3 D.LINK 3 – –
GAME 4 – – – –
MEDIA PLAYER 5 – 4 – 3
TV AUDIO – OPT1 – – –
AUX1 FRONT – FRONT – FRONT
AUX2 6 – – – –
CD – OPT2 5 – –
n TV set top box/satellite users please note
When using the optical or coaxial digital audio output on a TV/satellite
box
To play the video signal assigned to “HDMI” combined with the audio
signal assigned at “Input Assign” – “DIGITAL”, you will also need to
select “Digital” in the “Input Mode” (vpage171).
169
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
2 HDMI
Set this to change the HDMI input connectors assigned to the input
sources.
1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / FRONT :
Assign an HDMI input connector to the selected input source.
– : Do not assign an HDMI input connector to the selected input source.
%
•When “HDMI Control” (vpage163) is set to “On”, HDMI input connector
cannot be assigned to “TV AUDIO”.
2 DIGITAL
Set this to change the digital audio input connectors assigned to the
input sources.
COAX1 (Coaxial) / COAX2 / OPT1 (Optical) / OPT2 :
Assign a digital input connector to the selected input source.
D.LINK : Assign the Denon Link HD connector when the Denon Link
HD connection is established to a player compatible with the
Denon Link HD function (vpage43).
– : Do not assign a digital input connector to the selected input source.
2 ANALOG
Set this to change the analog audio input connectors assigned to the
input sources.
1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / FRONT : Assign a analog input connector to the
selected input source.
– : Do not assign a analog input connector to the selected input source.
2 COMP (Component video)
Set this to change the component video input connectors assigned to
the input sources.
1 / 2 : Assign the component video input connector to the selected
input source.
– : Do not assign a component video input connector to the selected
input source.
2 VIDEO
Set this to change the composite video input connectors assigned to
the input sources.
1 / 2 / 3 / FRONT : Assign the video input connector to the selected
input source.
– : Do not assign a video input connector to the selected input source.
2 Set Defaults
The “Input Assign” settings are returned to the default settings.
170
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Source Rename
Change the display name of the selected input source.
This is convenient when the input source name of your device and the
input source name of this unit are dierent. You can change the name to
suit your needs. When the renaming is completed, the name is displayed
on this unit’s display and on the menu screen.
CBL/SAT / DVD / Blu-ray / GAME / AUX1 / AUX2 / MEDIA PLAYER / CD /
TV AUDIO / PHONO : Change the display name of the selected input
source.
Set Defaults : The “Source Rename” settings are returned to the default
settings.
%
•Up to 12 characters can be input. For character input, see page148.
Hide Sources
Remove from the display input sources that are not used.
Show (Default) : Use this source.
Hide : Do not use this source.
Source Level
•This function corrects the playback level of the selected input source’s
audio input.
•Make this setting if there are dierences in the input volume levels
between the dierent sources.
2 Source Level
n When the input source is set to “iPod/USB”, “NETWORK” and
“HD Radio”
–12dB – +12dB (Default : 0dB)
2 Analog Inputs / Digital Inputs
n When the input source is set to “iPod/USB”, “NETWORK” and
“HD Radio”
–12dB – +12dB (Default : 0dB)
%
•The analog input level can be adjusted independently for input sources for which
“ANALOG” is assigned at “Input Assign” (vpage168).
•The digital input level can be adjusted independently for input sources for which
“DIGITAL” is assigned at “Input Assign” (vpage168).
171
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Input Select
Set the audio input mode and decode mode of each input source.
The input modes available for selection may vary depending on the input
source.
2 Input Mode
Set the audio input modes for the dierent input sources.
It is normally recommended to set the audio input mode to “Auto”.
Auto (Default) : Automatically detect input signal and perform playback.
HDMI : Play only signals from HDMI input.
Digital : Play only signals from digital input.
Analog : Play only signals from analog input.
%
•When digital signals are properly input, the ~ indicator lights on the display.
If the
~ indicator does not light, check “Input Assign” (vpage168) and
the connections.
•If “HDMI Control” is set to “On” and a TV compatible with the ARC is
connected via the HDMI MONITOR connectors, the input mode whose input
source is “TV AUDIO” is fixed to ARC.
2 Decode Mode
Set the audio decode mode for input source.
Auto (Default) : Detect type of digital input signal and decode and play
automatically.
PCM : Decode and play only PCM input signals.
DTS : Decode and play only DTS input signals.
%
•This item can be set for input sources for which “HDMI” or “DIGITAL” is
assigned at “Input Assign” (vpage168).
•Normally set this mode to “Auto”. It is recommended to set “PCM” or “DTS”
when audio is missing at the beginning or a noise occurs. Set “PCM” and
“DTS” when inputting the corresponding input signal.
172
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Speakers
The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and listening room are measured and the optimum settings are made automatically. This is called
“Audyssey® Setup”.
You do not have to perform Audyssey® Setup when you have already performed Speaker Calibration in Setup Assistant.
To set up the speakers manually, use “Manual Setup” (vpage181) on the menu.
Audyssey
®
Setup
To perform measurement, place the Setup and measurement microphone
in multiple locations all around the listening area. For best results, we
recommend you measure in six or more positions, as shown in the
illustration (up to eight positions).
%
•When performing Audyssey® Setup, Audyssey MultEQ® XT32/Audyssey Dynamic
EQ®/Audyssey Dynamic Volume® functions become active (vpage156, 158).
NOTE
•Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise can disrupt the room
measurements. Close windows and turn o the power on electronic devices
(TVs, radios, air conditioners, fluorescent lights, etc.). The measurements could be
aected by the sounds emitted by such devices.
•During the measurement process, place cell phones outside the listening room.
Cell phone signals could disrupt the measurements.
•Do not stand between the speakers and Setup and measurement microphone or
allow obstacles in the path while the measurements are being made. Do not hold
the Setup and measurement microphone in your hand during measurements. This
will cause inaccurate readings.
•During the measurement process, audible test tones will come from the speakers
and subwoofer(s), but this is part of normal operation. If there is background noise
in the room, these test signals will increase in volume.
•Operating VOLUME
df on the remote control unit or MASTER VOLUME on the
main unit during the measurements will cancel the measurements.
•Measurement cannot be performed when headphones are connected. Unplug the
headphones before performing Audyssey® Setup.
173
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
2 About Setup and measurement microphone
placement
•Measurements are performed by placing the Setup and measurement
microphone successively at multiple positions throughout the entire
listening area, as shown in GExample qH.
•Even if the listening environment is small as shown in GExample wH,
measuring at multiple points throughout the listening environment
results in more eective correction.
FL SW C FR
SRSL
*
M
FL SW C FR
SRSL
*
M
(
: Measuring positions)
GExample qH GExample wH
(
: Measuring positions)
FL Front speaker (L) SW Subwoofer
FR Front speaker (R) SL Surround speaker (L)
C Center speaker SR Surround speaker (R)
2 About the main listening position (*M)
The main listening position is the position where listeners would
normally sit or where one would normally sit alone within the listening
environment. Before starting Audyssey® Setup, place the Setup and
measurement microphone in the main listening position. Audyssey
MultEQ® XT32 uses the measurements from this position to calculate
speaker distance, level, polarity, and the optimum crossover value for
the subwoofer.
2 About Audyssey Sub EQ HT™
Audyssey Sub EQ HT™ makes the integration of dual subwoofers
seamless by first compensating for any level and delay dierences
between the two subwoofers and then applying Audyssey MultEQ®
XT32 to both subwoofers together.
To run Audyssey Sub EQ HT™ you must select “Measure (2 spkrs)” in
“Channel Select” (vpage175).
174
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Procedure for speaker settings
(Audyssey
®
Setup)
Preparation
Measurement
Calculation
Check
Store
Finish
1
Mount the Setup and measurement microphone on a
tripod or stand and place it in the main listening position.
When you set the setup microphone, point the tip of it toward the
ceiling, at the height of your ears in your listening position.
2
If using a subwoofer capable of the following
adjustments, set up the subwoofer as shown below.
n When using a subwoofer with a direct mode
Set the direct mode to “On” and disable the volume adjustment
and crossover frequency setting.
n When using a subwoofer without a direct mode
Make the following settings:
•Volume : “12 o’clock position”
•Crossover frequency : “Maximum/Highest Frequency”
•Low pass filter : “O”
•Standby mode : “O”
175
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
3
Connect the Setup and measurement microphone to
the SETUP MIC jack of this unit.
Audyssey Setup
Channel Select
Amp Assign
Check Results
Restore...
Start
Your AV receiver can automatically measure the acoustics of
your room then optimize your speakers using the included
microphone.
Set the following items
if necessary.
When the Setup and measurement
microphone is connected, the
following screen is displayed.
4
Select “Start” and then press ENTER.
Audyssey® Setup can also make the following settings.
•Amp Assign
The signal output from the SURROUND BACK, FRONT HEIGHT
and FRONT WIDE speaker terminals of this unit can be switched
to match your speaker environment. Refer to “Amp Assign”
(vpage181).
•Channel Select
If channels that are not to be used are set in advance,
measurement for the set channels is skipped, and measuring
time can be reduced. You can also change the number of surround
back speakers and subwoofer.
5
Select “Next” and then press ENTER.
176
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
6
Select “Begin Test” and then press ENTER.
•Measurement requires several minutes.
NOTE
•If “Caution!” is displayed on TV screen:
Go to “Error messages” (vpage 179). Check any related items, and
perform the necessary procedures.
•If the volume level for the subwoofer is not appropriate, an error message
is displayed. See “Subwoofer level error message and how to adjust”
(vpage180).
n When measuring has stopped
q Press BACK to display the popup screen.
w Press o to select “Yes”, and then press ENTER.
7
The detected speakers are displayed.
Audyssey Setup
Repeat Last Test Next
Speaker Detection
Front
Center
Subwoofer
Surround
:Yes
:Yes
:Yes
:Yes
8
Select “Next” and then press ENTER.
9
Move the Setup and measurement microphone to
position 2, select “Continue”, and then press ENTER.
The measurement of the second position starts. Measurements
can be made in up to eight positions.
Audyssey Setup
Calculation
Back
Continue
Place the microphone at ear level at the 2nd listening position,
then select “Continue”...
%
•To skip measuring the second and subsequent listening position, use i to
select “Calculation” and press ENTER to proceed to step 12.
177
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
10
Repeat step 9, measuring positions 3 to 8.
11
Select “Calculation” and then press ENTER.
Audyssey Setup
Calibration completed! Now calculating...Please wait.
50%
•Analysis takes several minutes to complete. The more speakers
and measurement positions that there are, the more time it takes
to perform the analysis.
12
Use ui to select the item you want to check, and then
press ENTER.
Audyssey Setup
Distances
Speaker Config.
Levels
Crossovers
Store
Check processing results. To proceed, press “Store”.
•Subwoofers may measure a greater reported distance than
the actual distance due to added electrical delay common in
subwoofers.
178
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
13
Select “Store” and then press ENTER.
Save the measurement results.
Audyssey Setup
Distances
Speaker Config.
Levels
Crossovers
Store
Check processing results. To proceed, press “Store”.
•Saving the results requires about 20 seconds.
NOTE
•During saving of measurement results, be sure not to turn o the power.
14
Unplug the Setup and measurement microphone from
the unit’s SETUP MIC jack.
15
Set Audyssey Dynamic Volume
®
.
Audyssey Setup
Yes
No
You can set Dynamic Volume function, which automatically
adjust volume level for all content.
Do you want to enable?
•This feature adjusts the output volume to the optimal level while
constantly monitoring the level of the audio input to the unit.
Optimal volume control is performed automatically without any
loss in the dynamism and clarity of the sound when, for example,
the volume suddenly increases for commercials shown during
television programs.
NOTE
•After performing Audyssey® Setup, do not change the speaker connections or
subwoofer volume. In event of a change, perform Audyssey® Setup again.
179
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Error messages
An error message is displayed if Audyssey® Setup could not be completed due to speaker placement, the measurement environment, etc. If an error
message is displayed, check the relevant items and perform the necessary measures. Be sure to turn o the power before checking speaker connections.
Examples Error details Measures
Microphone or Speaker is
None
•Setup and measurement microphone is not
detected.
•Not all speakers could be detected.
•Connect the included Setup and measurement microphone to the
SETUP MIC jack of this unit.
•Check the speaker connections.
Ambient noise is too high or
level is too low
•There is too much noise in the room.
•Speaker or subwoofer sound is too low.
•Either turn o any device generating noise or move it away.
•Perform again when the surroundings are quieter.
•Check the speaker installation and the direction in which the
speakers are facing.
•Adjust the subwoofer’s volume.
Front R : None •The displayed speaker could not be
detected.
•Check the connections of the displayed speaker.
Front R : Phase •The displayed speaker is connected with
the polarity reversed.
•Check the polarity of the displayed speaker.
•For some speakers, this error message may be displayed even if
the speaker is properly connected. If you are sure the connection is
correct, use p to select “Skip Error”, then press ENTER.
180
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
2 Subwoofer level error message and how to
adjust
The optimal level of each subwoofer channel for Audyssey Setup
measurement is 75 dB.
During subwoofer level measurement (vpage 172 “Audyssey®
Setup”), an error message is displayed when one level of subwoofers
is outside the 72 – 78 dB range.
When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (active type), adjust the
subwoofer volume so that the subwoofer level is within the 72 to 78
dB range.
GError messageH
Audyssey Setup
Back SW Level MatchingSkip
Your Subwoofer 1’s level is too high.
If your subwoofer has a volume control on it,
Select “SW Level Matching” to interactively adjust the level of
your subwoofer.
If your subwoofer does not have a volume control,
or if you do not want to use a subwoofer, select “Skip”.
1
Select “SW Level Matching” and then press ENTER.
2
Adjust the volume control on your subwoofer so that
the measured level is within the 72 to 78 dB range.
3
When the measured level is within the 72 to 78 dB
range, select “Next” and then press ENTER.
•If you use two subwoofers, the second subwoofer’s adjustment
will be started.
Repeat the operation from step 2, 3.
Retrieving Audyssey
®
Setup settings
If you set “Restore...” to “Restore”, you can return to Audyssey® Setup
measurement result (value calculated at the start by MultEQ® XT32) even
when you have changed each setting manually.
Audyssey Setup
Channel Select
Amp Assign
Check Results
Restore...
Start
Your AV receiver can automatically measure the acoustics of
your room then optimize your speakers using the included
microphone.
Set the following items
if necessary.
181
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Manual Setup
Perform when setting the speakers manually or when changing settings
made in Audyssey® Setup.
•If you change the speaker settings after performing Audyssey® Setup,
it will not be possible to select Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey
Dynamic EQ® and Audyssey Dynamic Volume® (vpage156, 158).
•“Manual Setup” can be used without changing the settings. Please set
if necessary.
Amp Assign
Select power amplifier usage method to match your speaker system.
2 Assign Mode
Set the assignment mode.
7.1ch(SB/FH/FW) : Assigns all power amplifiers within this unit for
MAIN ZONE.
5.1ch + ZONE2 (Default) : Setting to assign the unit’s built-in power
amplifier for ZONE2 and output the audio in
stereo.
5.1ch + ZONE3 : Setting to assign the unit’s built-in power amplifier for
ZONE3 and output the audio in stereo.
5.1ch + ZONE2/3-MONO : Setting to assign the unit’s built-in power
amplifier for ZONE2 and ZONE3 and
output the audio in monaural.
5.1ch(Bi-Amp) : Setting to use the front speakers via the bi-amp
connection.
5.1ch + Front B : Setting to use the second set of front speakers for
playback. You can switch the front speakers A and
B to be used for playback in accordance with the
2-channel playback or multi-channel playback mode.
When you select this setting, also perform the
“Front Speaker Setup” (vpage187) procedure.
7.1ch/2ch Front : Setting to use the other front speakers for playback
when you do 2-channel playback in DIRECT or
STEREO mode. When you select this setting, also
perform the “Front Speaker Setup” (vpage187)
procedure.
9.1ch(SB/FH/FW) : Setting to use a maximum 9.1 channel speaker
system by using a combination of the unit’s
7-channel built-in amp with an external power amp
connected to a set of 2-channel speakers.
182
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
2 Main Pre-amps
Selects the PRE OUT connector that is connected to the external power
amplifier used in MAIN ZONE when “Assign Mode” (vpage181) is
set to “9.1ch(SB/FH/FW)”.
Surround Back (Default) : The surround back left and right pre-amp
outputs are connected to an external
amplifier.
Front Height : The front height left and right pre-amp outputs are
connected to an external amplifier.
Front Wide : The front wide left and right pre-amp outputs are
connected to an external amplifier.
Front : The front left and right pre-amp outputs are connected to an
external amplifier.
Speaker Config.
Indicate speaker presence and select speaker size categories based on
bass reproduction capability.
2 Front
Set the front speaker size.
Large (Default) : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very
low bass frequencies.
Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for
very low bass frequencies. Note that for most multi-channel
speakers, this is the best choice.
%
•When “Subwoofer” is set to “No”, “Front” is automatically set to “Large”.
•When “Front” is set to “Small”, “Center”, “Surround“, “Surr. Back”, “Front
Height” and “Front Wide” can not be set to “Large”.
2 Center
Set the presence and size of the center speaker.
Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low
bass frequencies.
Small (Default) : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback
capacity for very low bass frequencies. Note that this
is almost always the best choice.
None : Select when a center speaker is not connected.
183
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
2 Surr.Back
Set the presence, size and number of surround back speakers.
Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low
bass frequencies.
Small (Default) : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback
capacity for very low bass frequencies. Note that this
is almost always the best choice.
None : Select when the surround back speakers are not connected.
2spkrs (Default) : Use two surround back speakers.
1spkr : Use only one surround back speaker. When you select this
setting, connect the surround back speaker to the left (L)
channel.
%
•When “Assign Mode” (vpage181) setting is “7.1ch (SB/FH/FW)”, “9.1ch
(SB/FH/FW)” or “7.1ch/2ch Front”, you can make the “Surr. Back” setting.
2 Subwoofer
Set the presence of a subwoofer.
2spkrs : Use two subwoofers.
1spkr (Default) : Use only one subwoofer.
None : Select when a subwoofer is not connected.
%
•When “Front” is set to “Small”, “Subwoofer” is automatically set to “1spkr”.
2 Surround
Set the presence and size of the surround speakers.
Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low
bass frequencies.
Small (Default) : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback
capacity for very low bass frequencies. Note that this
is almost always the best choice.
None : Select when the surround speakers are not connected.
%
•When “Surround” is set to “None”, “Surr.Back”, “Front Height” and “Front
Wide” are automatically set to “None”.
184
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
2 Front Height
Set the presence and size of the front height speakers.
Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low
bass frequencies.
Small (Default) : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback
capacity for very low bass frequencies. Note that this
is almost always the best choice.
None : Select when the front height speakers are not connected.
%
•When “Assign Mode” (vpage181) setting is “7.1ch (SB/FH/FW)” or
“9.1ch (SB/FH/FW)”, you can make the “Front Height” setting.
2 Front Wide
Set the presence and size of the front wide speakers.
Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low
bass frequencies.
Small (Default) : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback
capacity for very low bass frequencies. Note that this
is almost always the best choice.
None : Select when the front height speakers are not connected.
%
•When “Assign Mode” (vpage181) setting is “7.1ch (SB/FH/FW)” or
“9.1ch (SB/FH/FW)”, you can make the “Front Wide” setting.
Distances
Set distance from listening position to speakers.
Measure beforehand the distance from the listening position to each
speaker.
2 Unit
Set the unit of distance.
Feet (Default)
Meters
2 Step
Set the minimum variable width of the distance.
1ft (Default) / 0.1ft
0.1m / 0.01m
2 Set Defaults
The “Distances” settings are returned to the default settings.
2 Set the distance
0.0ft – 60.0ft / 0.00m – 18.00m
%
•The speakers that can be selected dier depending on the “Amp Assign”
(vpage181) and “Speaker Config.” (vpage182) settings.
•Default settings :
Front L / Front R / F. Height L / F. Height R / F. Wide L / F. Wide R / Center /
Subwoofer : 12.0 ft (3.60 m)
Surround L / Surround R / Surr.Back L / Surr.Back R : 10.0 ft (3.00 m)
•Set the dierence in the distance between the speakers to less than 20.0 ft
(6.00 m).
185
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Levels
Set the volume of the test tone to be the same when it is output from
each speaker.
2 Test Tone Start
Output test tone. A test tone is output from the selected speaker.
While listening to the test tone, adjust the volume output from the
selected speaker.
–12.0dB – +12.0dB (Default : 0.0dB)
%
•When “Levels” is adjusted, the adjusted values are set for all the sound
modes.
•When headphones are connected to the PHONES connector on this unit, you
cannot set “Levels”.
2 Set Defaults
The “Levels” settings are returned to the default settings.
Crossovers
Set the maximum frequency of the bass signal output from each channel to
the subwoofer. Set the Crossover Frequency to suit the bass reproduction
capability of the speaker being used.
2 Speaker Selection
Selects how to set the crossover frequency. See the speaker manual
for information concerning speaker crossover frequency.
All (Default) : Selects the crossover point of all speakers at the same
time.
Individual : Selects the crossover points for each speaker individually.
186
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
2 Set the crossover frequency
40Hz / 60Hz / 80Hz (Default) / 90Hz / 100Hz / 110Hz / 120Hz / 150Hz
/ 200Hz / 250Hz
%
•“Crossovers” can be set when the “Subwoofer Mode” (vpage186)
setting is “LFE+Main”, or when you have a speaker that is set to “Small”.
•The default crossover frequency is “80Hz”, which will work best with the
widest variety of speakers. When using very small speakers, however, you
can choose a higher setting based on the specified frequency response of the
speakers. If the speaker has a specified frequency response of 120 Hz – 20
kHz (as an example), then choose the 120 Hz crossover frequency.
•For speakers set to “Small”, low frequency content below the crossover
frequency is attenuated to the speakers and the low bass content is then
re-delivered to the subwoofer, or the front (L/R) speakers if they have been
set to Large.
•The speakers that can be set when “Individual” is selected dier depending
on to the “Subwoofer Mode” (vpage186) setting.
•When “LFE” is selected, speakers set to “Small” at “Speaker Config.”
(vpage182) can be set. If the speakers are set to “Large”, “Full Band” is
displayed and the setting cannot be made.
•When “LFE+Main” is selected, speakers can be set regardless of the
“Speaker Config.” (vpage182) setting.
Bass
Set subwoofer and LFE signal range playback.
2 Subwoofer Mode
Select low range signals to be reproduced by subwoofer.
LFE (Default) : The low range signal of the channel set to “Small”
speaker size is added to the LFE signal output from the
subwoofer.
LFE+Main : The low range signal of all channels is added to the LFE
signal output from the subwoofer. This is usually the best
setting for most systems.
%
•“Subwoofer Mode” can be set when “Speaker Config.” – “Subwoofer”
(vpage183) is set to other than “No”.
•Play music or a movie source and select the mode oering the strongest
bass.
•If “Front” and “Center” for “Speaker Config.” (vpage182) are set to
“Large”, and “Subwoofer Mode” is set to “LFE”, no sound may be output
from the subwoofers, depending on the input signal or selected sound mode.
Select “LFE+Main” if you want the bass signals to always be produced from
the subwoofer.
2 LPF for LFE
Set LFE signal playback range. Set this when you want to change the
playback frequency (low pass filter point) of the subwoofer.
80Hz / 90Hz / 100Hz / 110Hz / 120Hz (Default) / 150Hz / 200Hz / 250Hz
187
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Front Speaker Setup
Set the front speakers to use for every sound mode.
%
•This can be set when “Assign Mode” (vpage181) is set to “5.1ch + Front B”
and “7.1ch/2ch Front”.
2 2ch Playback
The front speakers used in direct play (2-channel), stereo play and pure
direct play (2-channel) are set in advance.
A (Default) : Front speaker A is used.
B : Front speaker B is used.
A+B : Both front speakers A and B are used.
2 Multi ch Playback
The front speakers used in play modes other than direct play (2-channel),
stereo play and pure direct play (2-channel) are set in advance.
A (Default) : Front speaker A is used.
B : Front speaker B is used.
A+B : Both front speakers A and B are used.
2ch Playback
Select the method for setting the speakers used in the 2-channel direct
and stereo playback modes.
%
•This can be set when “Assign Mode” (vpage181) is set to “7.1ch/2ch Front”.
2 Setting
Select the method for setting the speakers used in the 2-channel direct
and stereo playback modes.
Auto (Default) : The settings at “Speakers” (vpage172) are applied.
Manual : Make separate settings for 2-channel. Make the following
settings:
2 Front
Set the front speaker size.
Large (Default) : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very
low bass frequencies.
Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for
very low bass frequencies.
%
•If “Speaker Config.” – “Subwoofer” (vpage183) is set to “None”, the
setting is automatically set to “Large”.
188
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
2 Subwoofer
Set the presence of a subwoofer.
Yes (Default) : Use a subwoofer.
No : Select when a subwoofer is not connected.
%
•If “Speaker Config.” – “Subwoofer” (vpage183) is set to “None”, the
setting is automatically set to “No”. If the “Front” setting is “Small”, the
setting is automatically “Yes”.
2 SW Mode
Select low range signals to be reproduced by subwoofer.
LFE (Default) : When the “2ch Playback – “Front” setting is set to
“Large”, the LFE signal alone is output from the
subwoofer. Also, when the “2ch Playback” – “Front”
setting is set to “Small”, the front channel low range
signal is added to the LFE signal output from the
subwoofer.
LFE+Main : The front channel low range signal is added to the LFE
signal output from the subwoofer.
%
•This setting can be set made “2ch Playback” – “Subwoofer” is set to “Yes”.
2 Crossover
Set the maximum frequency of the bass signal output from each
channel to the subwoofer.
40Hz / 60Hz / 80Hz (Default) / 90Hz / 100Hz / 110Hz / 120Hz / 150Hz
/ 200Hz / 250Hz
%
•This setting can be set made “2ch Playback” – “Subwoofer” is set to “Yes”.
•If the “2ch Playback” – “Front” setting is “Large” and the “SW Mode”
setting is “LFE”, “Full Band” is displayed and the setting cannot be made.
2 Distance FL / Distance FR
Select speaker for distance setting.
0.0ft – 60.0ft (Default : 12.0ft) / 0.00m – 18.00m (Default : 3.60m) :
Set distance from main listening position to speaker.
%
•Set the dierence in the distance between the speakers to less than 20.0 ft
(6.00 m).
2 Level FL / Level FR
Select speaker for level adjustment.
–12.0dB – +12.0dB (Default : 0.0dB) :
Adjust the level of each channel.
189
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Network
To use this unit by connecting it to a home network (LAN), you must configure network settings.
If you set up your home network (LAN) via DHCP, set “DHCP” to “On” (use the default setting). This allows this unit to use your home network (LAN).
If you assign an IP address for each device, you must use the “IP Address” setting to assign an IP address to this unit and enter the information about
your home network (LAN) such as the gateway address and subnet mask.
Information
Display network information.
Friendly Name / DHCP On or O / IP Address / MAC Address
%
•MAC Address is required to make a vTuner account.
IP Control
Enables network communication in standby power mode.
O In Standby : Suspend network function during standby.
Always On (Default) : Network is on during standby. Main unit operable
with a network compatible controller.
%
•Set to “Always On” when using the web control function.
NOTE
•When “IP Control” is set to “Always On”, it consumes more standby power.
Friendly Name
The Friendly Name is the name of this unit displayed on the network. You
can change the Friendly Name according to your preferences.
2 Edit Name
Edits Friendly Name.
%
•The default Friendly Name on first use is “Denon AVR-X4000”.
•Up to 63 characters can be input.
•For character input, see page148.
2 Set Defaults
Restores Friendly Name, which you had changed, to the default setting.
190
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Settings
Make settings for wired LAN.
•If you are using a broadband router (DHCP function), there is no need
to make the settings at “IP Address” and “Proxy”, since the DHCP
function is set to “On” in this unit’s default settings.
•Only set “Settings” when connecting to a network without a DHCP
function.
DHCP
-IP Address
-Subnet Mask
Proxy
Save
Cancel
-Address
-Port
-Default Gateway
-Primary DNS
-Secondary DNS
Configure the network settings manually
Off
192.168.000.001
255.255.255.000
255.255.255.000
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
Off
000.000.000.000
00000
Network/Settings
2 DHCP
Selects how to connect to the network.
On (Default) : Configure the network settings automatically from your
router.
O : Configure the network settings manually.
2 IP Address
Set the IP address within the ranges shown below.
•The Network Audio function cannot be used if other IP addresses
are set.
CLASS A: 10.0.0.1 – 10.255.255.254
CLASS B: 172.16.0.1 – 172.31.255.254
CLASS C: 192.168.0.1 – 192.168.255.254
2 Subnet Mask
When connecting an xDSL modem or connector adapter directly to this
unit, input the subnet mask indicated in the documentation supplied by
your provider. Normally input 255.255.255.0.
2 Default Gateway
When connected to a gateway (router), input its IP address.
2 Primary DNS, Secondary DNS
If there is only one DNS address indicated in the documentation
supplied by your provider, input it at “Primary DNS”. If two or more
DNS are provided by your provider, enter both “Primary DNS” and
“Secondary DNS”.
191
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
2 Proxy
Make this setting when connecting to the Internet via a proxy server.
Make the proxy settings only when you connect to the Internet via
a proxy server that is on your internal network or provided by your
provider, etc.
On(Address) : Select when inputting by address.
On(Name) : Select when inputting by domain name. Up to 38
characters can be input.
O (Default) : Disables the proxy server.
2 Port
Enter port number.
%
•If you cannot connect to the Internet, recheck the connections and settings
(vpage50).
•If you do not understand about Internet connection, contact your ISP (Internet
Service Provider) or the store from which you purchased your computer.
Diagnostics
Used to check the network connection.
2 Physical Connection
Checks the physical LAN port connection.
OK
Error : The LAN cable is not connected. Check the connection.
2 Router Access
Checks the connection from this unit to the router.
OK
Error : Failed to communicate with the router. Check the router
settings.
2 Internet Access
Checks whether this unit has access to the Internet (WAN).
OK
Error : Failed to connect to the Internet. Check the Internet connection
environment or router settings.
192
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Maintenance Mode
Use when receiving maintenance from a Denon service engineer or custom
installer. Ordinarily, this mode isn’t suitable for use by the end user, only
by a trained service technician or custom installation professional.
NOTE
•Only use this function if so instructed by a Denon serviceperson or installer.
193
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Language
Set the language for display on the menu screen.
English (Default) / Français / Español
%
•“Language” can also be set by the following procedure. However, the menu
screen is not displayed.
Following the display content to make the setting.
1. Press and hold the main unit’s
o p for at least 3 seconds.
“zVideo Format <NTSC>” appears on the display.
2. Press the main unit’s
i.
“zGUI Language <ENGLISH>” appears on the display.
3. Use the main unit’s
o p and set the language.
4. Press the main unit’s ENTER to complete the setting.
General
Make various other settings.
ZONE2 Setup / ZONE3 Setup
Set the audio to play back with multi-zone (ZONE2, ZONE3).
%
•The setting values (dB) for “Volume Limit” and “Power On Volume” are what is
displayed when “Scale” (vpage155) in the menu is set to “–79.5dB – 18.0dB”.
2 Bass
Adjust bass tones.
–14dB – +14dB (Default : 0dB)
2 Treble
Adjust treble tones.
–14dB – +14dB (Default : 0dB)
2 High Pass Filter
Make settings for cutting the low range to reduce distortion in the bass.
On : The low range is attenuated.
O (Default) : The low range is not attenuated.
194
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
2 Lch Level
Adjust the left channel output level.
–12dB – +12dB (Default : 0dB)
2 Rch Level
Adjust the right channel output level.
–12dB – +12dB (Default : 0dB)
2 Channel
Set the signal output from multi-zone.
Stereo (Default) : Select stereo output.
Mono : Select monaural output.
%
•When “Assign Mode” (vpage181) is set to “5.1ch + ZONE2/3-MONO”,
the “Channel” setting is automatically set to “Mono”.
2 HDMI Audio (ZONE2 only)
Selects the audio signal format for playing an HDMI source in ZONE2.
Through (Default) : The HDMI audio signal is passed through the AV
receiver to the device in ZONE2.
PCM : The HDMI audio signal is converted to PCM format so you
can listen to HDMI sound from the ZONE2 pre out or ZONE2
assigned speakers.
2 Volume Level
Set the volume output level.
Variable (Default) : Volume adjustment is enabled by main unit and
remote control unit.
1 – 98 (–79dB – 18dB) : The volume is adjusted to the set level.
2 Volume Limit
Make a setting for maximum volume.
60 (–20dB) / 70 (–10dB) / 80 (0dB) (Default : 70 (–10dB))
O : Do not set a maximum volume.
%
•This can be set when “Volume Level” is set to “Variable”.
2 Power On Volume
Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.
Last (Default) : Use the memorized setting from the last session.
Mute : Always mute when power is turned on.
1 – 98 (–79dB – 18dB) : The volume is adjusted to the set level.
%
•This can be set when “Volume Level” is set to “Variable”.
195
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
2 Mute Level
Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.
Full (Default) : The sound is muted entirely.
–40dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down.
–20dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.
%
•This can be set when “Volume Level” is set to “Variable”.
Zone Rename
Change the display title of each zone to one you prefer.
MAIN ZONE / ZONE2 / ZONE3
Set Defaults : The input source name is returned to the default setting.
%
•Up to 10 characters can be input.
•For character input, see page148.
Quick Select Names
Change the “Quick Select” display title to one you prefer.
Quick Select 1 / Quick Select 2 / Quick Select 3 / Quick Select 4
Set Defaults : The input source name is returned to the default setting.
%
•Up to 16 characters can be input.
•For character input, see page148.
Trigger Out 1 / Trigger Out 2
Selects when to activate trigger out.
For details about how to connect the TRIGGER OUT jacks, see “TRIGGER
OUT jacks” (vpage52).
n When setting for zone (MAIN ZONE / ZONE2 / ZONE3)
Trigger out is activated through linkage to the power of the zone set
to “On”.
n When setting for input source
Activate trigger out when the input source set to “On” is selected.
n When setting for HDMI monitor
Activate trigger out when the HDMI monitor set to “On” is selected.
On : Activate trigger on this mode.
– – – : Do not activate trigger on this mode.
196
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Auto Standby
When you do not perform any operation on this unit with no audio or video
input for a specified time, this unit automatically enters the standby mode.
Before it enters the standby mode, “Auto Standby” is displayed on the
display of this unit and the menu screen.
60 min : The unit goes into standby after 60 minutes.
30 min : The unit goes into standby after 30 minutes.
O (Default) : The unit does not go into standby automatically.
Front Display
Makes settings related to the display on this unit.
2 Dimmer
Adjust the display brightness of this unit.
Bright (Default) : Normal display brightness.
Dim : Reduced display brightness.
Dark : Very low display brightness.
O : Turns the display o.
%
•You can also adjust the display by turning DIMMER on the main unit.
2 Channel Indicators
Sets whether to use the input signal display or output signal display for
the channel indication on the display.
Input : Uses the input signal display for the channel indication on the
display.
Output (Default) : Uses the output signal display for the channel
indication on the display.
197
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Information
Show information about receiver settings, input signals, etc.
2 Audio
Show the audio information for MAIN ZONE.
Sound Mode : The currently set sound mode.
Input Signal : The input signal type.
Format : The number of input signal channels (presence of front,
surround, LFE).
Sample Rate : The input signal’s sampling frequency.
Oset : The dialogue normalization correction value.
Flag : This is displayed when inputting signals including a surround
back channel. “MATRIX” is displayed with Dolby Digital EX
and DTS-ES Matrix signals, “DISCRETE” with DTS-ES Discrete
signals.
Dialogue normalization function
This function is automatically activated when playing Dolby Digital,
Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS and DTS-HD sources.
It automatically corrects the standard signal level for individual
program sources.
The correction value can be checked using the STATUS on the main
unit.
Dial.Norm
Offset - 4dB
The figure is the corrected value. This cannot be changed.
2 Video
Show the HDMI input/output signals and HDMI monitor information
for MAIN ZONE.
HDMI Signal Info.
Resolution / Color Space / Pixel Depth
HDMI Monitor 1 / HDMI Monitor 2
Interface / Resolutions
2 ZONE
Show information about current settings.
MAIN ZONE : This item shows information about settings for MAIN
ZONE. The information displayed diers according to
the input source.
ZONE2 : This item shows information about settings for ZONE2.
ZONE3 : This item shows information about settings for ZONE3.
2 Firmware
Version : Displays information for the current firmware.
198
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
2 Notifications
Selects notification message preferences.
Notification Alerts
On (Default) : Displays notification messages from Denon in the popup
menu.
O : Does not display notification messages from Denon in the popup
menu.
%
•Press INFO to display current source name, volume, sound mode name, and other
information at the bottom of the screen.
SOUND
SOURCE
SIGNAL
EXT FHRFHL
SB SBRSBL
C FR FWRFLFWL
LFE SRSL
SBRSBL
C FRFL
SW SRSL
INPUT SIGNAL ACTIVE SPEAKERS
DOLBY TrueHD
Blu-ray
Dolby TrueHD
40.0
NOTE
•The status display screen cannot be displayed at a computer’s resolution (e.g. VGA)
is being played.
Usage Data
To help us improve our products and customer service, Denon collects
anonymous information about how you use your AV receiver (such as
frequently used input sources and sound modes and speaker settings).
Denon will never provide any information we collect to third parties.
Yes (Default) : Provide Denon with information about how you use this
unit via the network.
No : Do not provide Denon with information about how you use this unit
via the network.
199
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Firmware
Set whether or not to check for firmware update, update the firmware,
and display update and upgrade notifications.
2 Update
Update the firmware of the receiver.
Check for Update : Check for firmware updates. You can also check
approximately how long it will take to complete
an update.
Update Start : Execute the update process. When the update starts,
the menu screen is shut down. During the update, the
progress is shown on the display.
%
•If updating fails, the set automatically retries, but if updating is still not
possible, one of the messages shown below is displayed. If the display reads
as shown below, check the settings and network environment, then update
again.
Display Description
Updating fail Updating failed.
Login failed Failure to log into server.
Server is busy Server is busy. Wait a while then try again.
Connection fail Failure in connecting to server.
Download fail Downloading of the firmware has failed.
2 Notifications
When the latest firmware is available, a notification message is
displayed on the TV screen at power on.
Update
On (Default) : Display update message.
O : Do not display update message.
Upgrade
The notification message is displayed for about 20 seconds when the
power is turned on. Connect to broadband Internet (vpage 50)
when using this function.
On (Default) : Display upgrade message.
O : Do not display upgrade message.
200
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
2 Add New Feature
Display new features that can be downloaded to this unit and perform
an upgrade.
Upgrade Package : Display the items to be upgraded.
Upgrade Status : Display a list of the additional functions provided by
the upgrade.
Upgrade Start : Execute the upgrade process. When the upgrade
starts, the menu screen is shut down. During the
upgrade, the amount of upgrade time which has
elapsed is displayed.
%
•See the Denon website for details about upgrades.
•When the procedure is complete, “Registered” is displayed in this menu and
upgrades can be carried out. If the procedure has not been carried out, “Not
Registered” is displayed.
The ID number shown on this screen is needed when carrying out the
procedure.
The ID number can also be displayed by pressing and holding the main unit’s
u
and INFO for at least 3 seconds.
•If the upgrade is not successful, an error message identical to those in
“Update” will appear on the display. Check the settings and network
environment and then perform the upgrade again.
Notes concerning use of “Update” and “Add New Feature”
•In order to use these functions, you must have the correct system
requirements and settings for a broadband Internet connection
(vpage50).
•Do not turn o the power until updating or upgrading is completed.
•Even with a broadband connection to the Internet, approximately 1
hour is required for the updating/upgrading procedure to be completed.
•Once updating/upgrade starts, normal operations on this unit cannot
be performed until updating/upgrading is completed. Furthermore,
there may be cases where backup data is reset for the parameters,
etc., set on this unit.
•If the update or upgrade fails, press and hold the X on the main unit
for more than 5 seconds, or remove and re-insert the power cord.
“Update retry” appears on the display and update restarts from the
point at which update failed. If the error continues despite this, check
the network environment.
%
•Information regarding the “Update” function and “Add New Feature” will be
announced on the Denon web site each time related plans are defined.
201
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Setup Lock
Protect settings from inadvertent changes.
2 Lock
On : Turn protection on.
O (Default) : Turn protection o.
%
•When cancelling the setting, set “Lock” to “O”.
NOTE
•When “Lock” is set to “On”, no setting items are displayed except for “Setup
Lock”.
202
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Operating external devices with the remote control unit
InstaPrevue
AVR
SOUND MODE
RC-1185
MUTE
POWERZONE SELECT
PUREMOVIE GAME
MUSIC
GAME
CBL /
SAT
Blu-ray
DVD
AUX1
AUX2
NETWORK
INTERNET
RADIO
iPod/
USB
VOLUME
INFO
SETUP
MENU
2 3
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER0+10
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS TUV
ABC. /
DEF
SLEEP
WXYZ
MAIN
MEDIA
PLAYER
CD
INPUT
TVDEVICE
MENU
PHONO
DEV. TV AVR
TV
AUDIO
TUNER
FAVORITE STATION
1 2 3 4
CH/ PAGE
OPTION
BACK
ENTER
TUNE TUNE
CBL/SAT
DVD
Blu-ray
AUX1
GAME
AUX2
MEDIA PLAYER
CD
0 – 9
OPTION
SETUP
TV AUDIO
AVR
FAVORITE
1 – 4
STATION
Operation mode
indicators
When preset codes are registered in the included remote control unit, it
can then be used to operate any devices you have, such as DVD players
or TVs made by different manufacturers.
203
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Registering preset codes
There are two methods for registering preset codes; the simple method for
registering preset codes of Denon players, and the method for registering
the preset numbers of other manufacturers’ devices.
•Registering Denon Players (vpage203)
•Registering by entering preset numbers (vpage204)
2 Registering Denon Players
Use the following simple method to register the preset codes of Denon
Blu-ray Disc players, DVD players and CD players.
n Registering Blu-ray Disc Players
1
Press and hold down Blu-ray and OPTION until the
DEV, TV and AVR indicators on the remote are flashing
green, then release.
n Registering DVD Players
1
Press and hold down DVD and OPTION until the
DEV, TV and AVR indicators on the remote are flashing
green, then release.
n Registering CD Players
1
Press and hold down CD and OPTION until the DEV,
TV and AVR indicators on the remote are flashing green,
then release.
n Registering multiple players at the same time
1
Press and hold down FAVORITE STATION 1 – 4 and
OPTION until the DEV, TV and AVR indicators on the
remote are flashing green, then release.
Devices to be registered at the same time
Press and
hold down
the buttons
Bru-ray Disc
player
DVD player CD player
P P
FAVORITE
STATION 1
and
OPTION
P P
FAVORITE
STATION 2
and
OPTION
P P
FAVORITE
STATION 3
and
OPTION
P P P
FAVORITE
STATION 4
and
OPTION
NOTE
•Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your device, some buttons
may not operate. In this case, try “Registering by entering preset numbers”
(vpage204).
204
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
2 Registering by entering preset numbers
Before starting, confirm the preset number of the device that you want
to register and the buttons that can be registered in the Preset Code
Table (vpage263) in the Appendix.
1
Press and hold down the input source button that you
want to register the preset code to and SETUP until the
DEV, TV and AVR indicators are flashing green.
2
Enter the preset number (5 digits) listed for the device in
the Preset Code Table using the number buttons (0 – 9)
on the remote control.
%
•Some manufacturers use more than one type of remote control code. Preset codes
to change the number and verify correct operation.
NOTE
•Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your device, some buttons
may not operate.
205
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Operating devices
To operate an external device, press the input source button registered
with the preset code, followed by one of the buttons in the following
tables.
%
•The “DEV.” indicator lights when an external device is being operated.
•The “TV” indicator lights when the TV is being operated.
•To operate the menu of this unit, press AVR before operating the unit. The “AVR”
operation mode indicator lights when this unit is being operated.
n CBL/SAT group
(Set top box for satellite (SAT) / cable (CBL) / Media
player / IP TV) operation
Operation
buttons
Function
DEVICE X
Power on/o
DEVICE MENU Menu
CH/PAGE df
Switch channels (up/down)
INFO Information
OPTION Sub menu, Option
uio p
Cursor operation
ENTER
(Cursor)
Enter
BACK Back
SETUP Home menu
8 9
Previous / Next
1
Playback
6 7
Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
3
Pause
2
Stop
0 – 9, +10 Channel selection
ENTER
(Number)
3 digit entry
%
•DEVICE X buttons may power some devices on.
206
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
n TV group
(TV) operation
Operation
buttons
Function
TV X
TV power on/o
TV INPUT Switch TV input
TV MENU TV menu
CH/PAGE df
Switch channels (up/down)
INFO Information
OPTION Sub menu, Option
uio p
Cursor operation
ENTER
(Cursor)
Enter
BACK Back
SETUP Setup
8 9
Previous / Next
1
Playback
6 7
Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
3
Pause
2
Stop
0 – 9, +10 Channel selection
ENTER
(Number)
3 digit entry
n VCR/DVR group
(DVD recorder (DVR) / Personal video recorder
(PVR) / video cassette recorder (VCR)) operation
Operation
buttons
Function
DEVICE X
Power on/o
DEVICE MENU Menu
CH/PAGE df
Switch channels (up/down)
INFO Information
OPTION Sub menu, Option
uio p
Cursor operation
ENTER Enter
BACK Back
SETUP Setup
8 9
Previous / Next
1
Playback
6 7
Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
3
Pause
2
Stop
0 – 9, +10
Select title, chapter or channel
selection
%
•TV X and TV INPUT buttons can be operated at any time without pressing the TV
button.
•TV
X and DEVICE X buttons may power some devices on.
207
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
n BD/DVD group
(Blu-ray Disc player / HD-DVD player / DVD player)
operation
Operation
buttons
Function
DEVICE X
Power on/o
DEVICE MENU (Popup) Menu
CH/PAGE df
Switch channels (up/down)
INFO Information
OPTION Top menu
uio p
Cursor operation
ENTER Enter
BACK Back
SETUP Setup
8 9
Previous / Next
1
Playback
6 7
Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
3
Pause
2
Stop
0 – 9, +10
Select title, chapter or channel
selection
n Audio group
(CD player / CD recorder) operation
Operation
buttons
Function
DEVICE X
Power on/o
INFO Information
uio p
Cursor operation
ENTER Enter
8 9
Previous / Next
1
Playback
6 7
Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
3
Pause
2
Stop
0 – 9, +10
Select title, chapter or channel
selection
%
•DEVICE X buttons may power some devices on. (Only the power-on operation is
available for some Denon model devices as well.)
208
Appendix
TipsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Settings
Initializing registered preset codes
1
Press and hold down AVR and OPTION until the DEV,
TV and AVR indicators on the remote are flashing green,
then release.
Specifying the zone used with the
remote control unit
To prevent accidental misuse, you can set the zone for which the remote
control unit is used.
1
Press and hold down MAIN or ZONE2 or ZONE3 and
SETUP until the DEV, TV and AVR indicators on the
remote are flashing green, then release.
MAIN : When only using “MAIN ZONE”
2 : When using “MAIN ZONE” / “ZONE2”
3 (Default) : When using “MAIN ZONE” / “ZONE2” / “ZONE3”
Resetting the remote control unit
All the settings are restored to their defaults.
1
Press and hold down DEVICE MENU until the DEV, TV
and AVR indicators on the remote are flashing green,
then release.
2
Press 9, 8 and 1, in that order.
The remote control unit operation mode indicator flashes twice.
All the settings are restored to their defaults.
209
Appendix
SettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Tips
Tips
Contents
2 Tips ..................................................................(210)
I want the volume not to become too loud by mistake ..................(210)
I want to keep the volume at the same level when I turn the
power on ........................................................................................(210)
I want to have the subwoofer always output audio .......................(210)
I want to make human voices in the movies clearer ...................... (210)
I want to keep bass and clarity during playback at a lower
volume level ...................................................................................(210)
I want to automatically adjust the volume level dierence in
content such as TV and movies .....................................................(210)
I want to set the optimized listening environment after changing
the configuration/position of the speakers or changing a speaker
to a new one ..................................................................................(210)
I want to combine a desired video with the current music ............(211)
I want to play back photos from Flickr at the same time while
listening to the Internet radio .........................................................(211)
I want to delete unused input sources ........................................... (211)
I want to enjoy the same music in all zones at the home
party, etc. .......................................................................................(211)
I want to minimize the delay in video signals when I’m playing a
game on my game console. ...........................................................(211)
How to add Wi-Fi to the AV receiver? ............................................(211)
2 Troubleshooting ............................................(212)
Power does not turn on/Power is turned o ..................................(212)
Operations cannot be performed through the
remote control unit ......................................................................... (213)
Display on this unit shows nothing ................................................(213)
No sound comes out ......................................................................(214)
Desired sound does not come out .................................................(215)
Sound is interrupted or noise occurs ..............................................(217)
No video is shown on the TV .........................................................(218)
The menu screen is not displayed on the TV .................................(219)
iPod cannot be played back ............................................................ (220)
USB memory devices cannot be played back ................................(221)
File names on the iPod/USB memory device are not
displayed properly ..........................................................................(222)
The Internet radio cannot be played back ......................................(222)
Music files on PC or NAS cannot be played back...........................(223)
The HDMI control function does not work ..................................... (224)
When using HDMI ZONE2, the devices does not
function properly ............................................................................(224)
210
Appendix
SettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Tips
Tips
I want the volume not to become too loud by mistake.
•Set the volume upper limit for “Volume Limit” in the menu beforehand. This prevents children or others from increasing the volume too much by
mistake. You can set this for each zone (vpage156, 194).
I want to keep the volume at the same level when I turn the power on.
•By default, the volume setting when power was previously set to standby is applied at next power on. To use a fixed volume level, set the volume level
at power on for “Volume Limit” in the menu. You can set this for each zone (vpage156, 194).
I want to have the subwoofer always output audio.
•Depending on the input signals and sound mode, the subwoofer may not output audio.
When “Subwoofer Mode” in the menu is set to “LFE+Main”, you can have the subwoofer always output audio (vpage186).
I want to make human voices in the movies clearer.
•Use “Dialog Level” in the menu to adjust the level (vpage150).
I want to keep bass and clarity during playback at a lower volume level.
•Set “Dynamic EQ” in the menu to “On”. This setting corrects the frequency characteristics to allow you to enjoy clear sound without the bass being
lost even during playback at a lower volume level (vpage157).
I want to automatically adjust the volume level dierence in content such as TV and movies.
•Set “Dynamic Volume” in the menu. Volume level changes (between quiet scenes and loud scenes) in TV shows or movies are automatically adjusted
to your desired level (vpage158).
I want to set the optimized listening environment after changing the configuration/position of the speakers or
changing a speaker to a new one.
•Perform Audyssey® Setup. This automatically makes the optimized speaker settings for the new listening environment (vpage172).
211
Appendix
SettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Tips
I want to combine a desired video with the current music.
•Set “Video Select” in the option menu to “On”. You can combine the current music with your desired video source from Set-top Box or DVD, etc. while
listening to music from Tuner, CD, PHONO or the Internet radio (vpage109).
I want to play back photos from Flickr at the same time while listening to the Internet radio.
•After playing back photos from Flickr, start the slide show on the Internet radio playback screen (vpage108).
I want to delete unused input sources.
•Set unused input sources for “Hide Sources” in the menu. This allows you to skip unused input sources when rotating the SOURCE SELECT knob on
this unit (vpage170).
I want to enjoy the same music in all zones at the home party, etc.
•Set “All Zone Stereo” in the option menu to “On”. This allows you to simultaneously play back in ZONE2 the music that is played back in MAIN ZONE
(vpage111).
I want to minimize the delay in video signals when I’m playing a game on my game console.
•When the video is delayed against button operations with the controller on the game console, set “Video Mode” in the menu to “Game” (vpage165).
How to add Wi-Fi to the AV receiver?
•Connect a wireless LAN converter (sold separately) to the NETWORK connector on this unit.
212
Appendix
SettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Tips
Troubleshooting
If a problem should arise, first check the following:
1. Are the connections correct?
2. Is the set being operated as described in the owner’s manual?
3. Are the other devices operating properly?
If this unit does not operate properly, check the items listed in the table below. Should the problem persist, there may be a malfunction.
In this case, disconnect the power immediately and contact your store of purchase.
2 Power does not turn on / Power is turned o
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
Power does not turn on. •Check whether the power plug is correctly inserted into the power outlet.
53
Power automatically turns o. •The sleep timer is set. Turn on the power again.
•“Auto Standby” is set. “Auto Standby” is triggered when there is no operation for a set
amount of time. To disable “Auto Standby”, set “Auto Standby” on the menu to “O”.
128
196
Power turns o and the power
indicator flashes in red approx. every
2 seconds.
•Due to the temperature rise within this unit, the protection circuit is working. Turn o the
power and wait about an hour until this unit suciently cools down. Then, turn on the power
again.
•Please re-install this unit in a place having good ventilation.
246
–
Power turns o and the power
indicator flashes in red approx. every
0.5 seconds.
•Check the speaker connection. The protection circuit may have been activated because
speaker cable core wires came in contact with each other or a core wire was disconnected
from the connector and came in contact with the rear panel of this unit. After unplugging the
power cord, take corrective action such as firmly re-twisting the core wire or taking care of the
connector, and then reconnect the wire.
•Turn down the volume and turn on the power again.
•This unit’s amplifier circuit has failed. Turn o the power and please contact the Denon
service adviser.
28
55, 56
–
213
Appendix
SettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Tips
2 Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
Operations cannot be performed
through the remote control unit.
•Batteries are worn out. Replace with new batteries.
•Operate the remote control unit within a distance of about 23 ft/7 m from this unit and at an
angle of within 30°.
•Remove any obstacle between this unit and the remote control unit.
•Insert the batteries in the proper direction, checking the q and w marks.
•The set’s remote control sensor is exposed to strong light (direct sunlight, inverter type
fluorescent bulb light, etc.). Move the set to a place in which the remote control sensor will
not be exposed to strong light.
•The operation target zone does not correspond to the zone setting specified on the remote
control unit. Press MAIN, ZONE2 or ZONE3 to select the zone to operate.
•The remote control unit operating mode is used to operate other devices. Press the AVR
button to set the operating mode to AVR.
•When using a 3D video device, the remote control unit of this unit may not function due to
eects of infrared communications between units (such as TV and glasses for 3D viewing). In
this case, adjust the direction of units with the 3D communications function and their distance
to ensure they do not aect operations from the remote control unit of this unit.
8
8
–
8
–
138, 147
205
–
2 Display on this unit shows nothing
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
Display is o. •Set “Dimmer” on the menu to something other than “O”.
•When the sound mode is set to PURE DIRECT, the display is o.
196
114
214
Appendix
SettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Tips
2 No sound comes out
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
No sound comes out of speakers. •Check the connections for all devices.
•Insert connection cables all the way in.
•Check that input connectors and output connectors are not reversely connected.
•Check cables for damage.
•Check that speaker cables are properly connected. Check that cable core wires come in
contact with the metal part on speaker terminals. Also, securely tighten speaker terminals.
Check speaker terminals for looseness.
•Check that a proper input source is selected.
•Adjust the master volume.
•Cancel the mute mode.
•Check the digital input connector setting.
•Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device. On some devices, the digital
audio output is set to o by default.
•No sound is output from the speakers when headphones are connected.
28,37,38,41,
42,44,46,48,
50
–
–
–
28
55, 138
56, 138
56, 139
38,41,42
–
14
No sound comes out when using the
DVI-D connection.
•When this unit is connected to a device equipped with a DVI-D connector, no sound is output.
Make a separate audio connection.
–
215
Appendix
SettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Tips
2 Desired sound does not come out
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
The volume does not increase. •The maximum volume is set too low. Set the maximum volume using “Limit”on the menu.
•Appropriate volume correction processing is performed according to the input audio format
and settings, so the volume may not reach the upper limit.
156,194
–
No sound comes out with the HDMI
connection.
•Check the connection of the HDMI connectors.
•When outputting HDMI audio from the speakers, set “HDMI Audio Out” on the menu to
“AVR”. To output from the TV, set “TV”.
•When using the HDMI control function, check that the audio output is set to the AV amplifier
on the TV.
37,38
162
125
No sound comes out of a specific
speaker.
•Check that the speaker cable is properly connected.
•Check that a selection other than “None” is set for the “Speaker Config.” setting in menu.
•Check the “Assign Mode” setting in the menu.
•When the sound mode is “STEREO” and “VIRTUAL”, audio is only output from the front
speakers and subwoofer.
28
182,183
181
–
No sound is produced from
subwoofer.
•Check the subwoofer connections.
•Turn on the subwoofer’s power.
•Set “Speaker Config.” – “Subwoofer” on the menu to “Yes”.
•When “Speaker Config.” – “Front” in the menu is set to “Large”, depending on the input
signal and the sound mode, no sound may be output from the subwoofer.
•When no subwoofer audio signal (LFE) is included in the input signals, no sound may be
output from the subwoofer.
•You can make the subwoofer always output sound by setting the subwoofer mode to
“LFE+Main”.
29
–
183
182
186
186
216
Appendix
SettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Tips
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
DTS sound is not output. •Check that the digital audio output setting on the connected device is set to “DTS”.
•Set “Decode Mode” on the menu to “Auto” or “DTS”.
–
171
Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD, Dolby Digital
Plus audio is not output.
•Make HDMI connections.
•Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device. On some devices, “PCM” is
set by default.
41,42
–
Dolby PLg mode or DTS NEO:X mode
cannot be selected.
•It cannot be selected when “None” is set for “Speaker Config.” – “Center” and “Surround”.
•These cannot be selected when using the headphones.
182
–
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey
Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic
Volume® and “Audyssey LFC™”
cannot be selected.
•These cannot be selected when you have not performed Audyssey® Setup.
•Switch the sound mode to other than “DIRECT” or “PURE DIRECT”.
•These cannot be selected when using the headphones.
172
114
–
Audyssey DSX® cannot be selected. •It can be selected when using the front height or front wide speakers.
•It can be selected when using the center speaker.
•Switch the sound mode to DOLBY sound mode or DTS sound mode.
•This cannot be selected when using the headphones.
184
182
113
–
“Restorer” cannot be selected. •Check that an analog signal or PCM signal (Sample Rate=44.1/48 kHz) is input. For playback
of multichannel signals such as Dolby Digital or DTS surround, “Restorer” cannot be used.
•Switch the sound mode to other than “DIRECT” or “PURE DIRECT”.
155
114
No audio is output from PRE OUT or
speakers for ZONE2/ZONE3.
•In ZONE2/ZONE3, the audio can be played back when signals input from digital connectors
(OPTICAL/COAXIAL) are in 2ch PCM format.
•In ZONE2, the audio can be played back when signals input from the HDMI connector are
in 2ch PCM format. To play back the audio in ZONE2 irrespective of the input signal format,
set the “HDMI Audio” setting in the menu to “PCM”. Depending on the played back device,
the audio may not be played back even with this setting. In that case, set the audio format to
“PCM” on the played back device.
–
194
217
Appendix
SettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Tips
2 Sound is interrupted or noise occurs
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
During playback from the Internet
radio or USB memory device, sound
is occasionally interrupted.
•When the transfer speed of the USB memory device is slow, sound may occasionally be
interrupted.
•The network communication speed is slow or the radio station is busy.
–
–
When making a call on iPhone, noise
occurs in audio output on this unit.
•When making a call, keep a distance of 20 cm or longer between iPhone and this unit. –
Noise often occurs in FM/AM
broadcasting.
•Change the antenna orientation or position.
•Separate the AM loop antenna from the unit.
•Use an FM outdoor antenna.
•Separate the antenna from other connection cables.
48
48
48
48
218
Appendix
SettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Tips
2 No video is shown on the TV
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
No picture appears. •Check the connections for all devices.
•Insert connection cables all the way in.
•Check that input connectors and output connectors are not reversely connected.
•Check cables for damage.
•Match the input settings to the input connector of the TV connected to this unit.
•Check that the proper input source is selected.
•Check the video input connector setting.
•Check that the resolution of the player corresponds to that of the TV.
•Check whether the TV is compatible with copyright protection (HDCP). If connected to a
device not compatible with HDCP, video will not be output correctly.
•The HDMI signal cannot be converted to an analog signal. Use analog connections.
37,38,41,42,
44,46,48,50
–
–
–
168
55, 138
168
197
228
229
No video is shown on the TV with the
DVI-D connection.
•With the DVI-D connection, on some device combinations, devices may not function properly
due to the copy guard copyright protection (HDCP).
228
No video from an input source such
as a game console is shown on the
TV.
•When special video signals are input from a game console, etc., the video conversion function
may not function. Connect the input connector to the monitor output connector of the same
type.
–
While the menu is being displayed, no
video is shown on the TV.
•When the menu is operated during playback of some 3D video contents or of video at some
computer resolutions (such as VGA), no playback video is shown in the background of the
menu.
–
When using HDMI ZONE2, the video
output in MAIN ZONE is interrupted.
•When ZONE2 is operated with the same input source selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2,
video in MAIN ZONE may be interrupted.
–
219
Appendix
SettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Tips
2 The menu screen is not displayed on the TV
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
The menu screen or operation details
are not displayed.
•The menu screen is only displayed on this unit and a TV connected by HDMI cable. If this unit
is connected to a TV using a dierent video output connector, operate while watching the
display on this unit.
–
The menu screen is not displayed on
the TV.
•No status information is displayed for some 3D videos or videos with a computer resolution
such as VGA.
•When a 2D video is converted to a 3D video on the TV, the menu screen or status information
screen is not properly displayed.
•In the pure direct playback mode, the menu screen or status information is not displayed.
Switch to a sound mode other than the pure direct mode.
•Set the “TV Format” setting in the menu to a selection that is appropriate for the TV.
198
–
113,114
167
220
Appendix
SettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Tips
2 iPod cannot be played back
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
iPod cannot be connected. •When using iPod by connecting it to the USB port, some iPod variations are not supported.
•When iPod is connected by using a USB cable other than the genuine cable, iPod may not be
recognized. Use a genuine USB cable.
47
–
The AirPlay icon
' is not displayed
on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad.
•This unit and PC / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad are not connected to the same network (LAN).
Connect it to the same LAN as this unit.
•The firmware on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is not compatible with AirPlay. Update the
firmware to the latest version.
50
–
Audio is not output. •The volume on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is set to the minimum level. The volume on
iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is linked with the volume on this unit. Set a proper volume
level.
•The AirPlay playback is not performed, or this unit is not selected. Click the AirPlay icon
' on
the iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad screen and select this unit.
–
101
Audio is interrupted during the AirPlay
playback on iPhone / iPod touch /
iPad.
•Quit the application running in the background of the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad, and then play
using AirPlay.
•Some external factors may be aecting the wireless connection. Modify the network
environment by taking measures such as shortening the distance from the wireless LAN
access point.
–
–
iTunes cannot be played back through
the remote control unit.
•Enable the “Allow iTunes control from remote speakers” setting on iTunes. Then, you can
perform playback, pause, and skip operations through the remote control unit.
–
221
Appendix
SettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Tips
2 USB memory devices cannot be played back
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
“No Connection” is displayed. •The set cannot recognize a USB memory device. Disconnect and reconnect the USB memory
device.
•USB memory devices of a mass storage class or those compatible with MTP are supported.
•This unit does not support a connection through a USB hub. Connect the USB memory device
directly to the USB port.
•The USB memory device must be formatted to FAT16 or FAT32.
•Not all USB memory devices are guaranteed to work. Some USB memory devices are not
recognized. When using a type of portable hard disc drive compatible with the USB connection
that requires power from an AC adapter, use the AC adapter that came with the drive.
46
–
–
–
–
Files on the USB memory device are
not displayed.
•Files of a type not supported by this unit are not displayed.
•This unit can display a file structure with up to 8 levels and up to 5000 subfolders and files in
total. Modify the folder structure of the USB memory device.
•When multiple partitions exist on the USB memory device, only files on the first partition are
displayed.
61
–
–
Files on a USB memory device cannot
be played.
•Files are created in a format that is not supported by this unit. Check the formats supported
by this unit.
•You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected. Files that are copyright protected
cannot be played on this unit.
231
–
222
Appendix
SettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Tips
2 File names on the iPod/USB memory device are not displayed properly
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
The file names are not displayed
properly (“...”, etc.).
•Characters that cannot be displayed are used. This is not a malfunction. On this unit, characters
that cannot be displayed are replaced with a “.” (period).
–
2 The Internet radio cannot be played back
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
A list of broadcasting stations is not
displayed.
•The LAN cable is not properly connected, or the network is disconnected. Check the
connection status.
•Perform the network diagnostic mode.
50
–
Internet Radio cannot be played. •The selected radio station is broadcasting in a format that is not supported by this unit.
Formats that can be played back in this unit are MP3, WMA and AAC.
•The firewall function is enabled on the router. Check the firewall setting.
•The IP address is not properly set.
•Check the power of the router is on.
•To obtain the IP address automatically, enable the DHCP server function on the router. Also,
set the DHCP setting to “On” on this unit.
•To obtain the IP address manually, set the IP address and proxy on this unit.
•Some radio stations broadcast silently during some time period. In this case, no audio is
output. Wait for a while and select the same radio station, or select another radio station.
233
–
190
–
190
190, 191
74
Cannot connect to favorite radio
stations.
•Radio station is not currently in service. Register radio stations in service. –
For some radio stations, “Connection
down” is displayed and station cannot
be connected to.
•The selected radio station is not in service. Select a radio station in service. –
223
Appendix
SettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Tips
2 Music files on PC or NAS cannot be played back
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
Files stored on a computer cannot be
played.
•Files are stored in a non-compatible format. Record in a compatible format.
•You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected. Files that are copyright protected
cannot be played on this unit.
•Set and computer are connected by USB cable. The set’s USB port cannot be used for
connection to a computer.
•Media sharing settings are not correct. Change media sharing settings so that the unit can
access the folders on your computer.
232
–
–
78
Server is not found, or it is not
possible to connect to the server.
•The computer’s or router’s firewall is activated. Check the computer’s or router’s firewall
settings.
•Computer’s power is not turned on. Turn on the power.
•Server is not running. Launch the server.
•Set’s IP address is wrong. Check the set’s IP address.
–
–
–
189
Music files on PC cannot be played
back.
•Even if PC is connected to the USB connector on this unit, music files on it cannot be played
back. Connect PC or NAS to this unit through the network.
50
Files on PC or NAS are not displayed. •Files of a type not supported by this unit are not displayed.
232
Music stored on a NAS cannot be
played.
•If you use a NAS in conformity with the DLNA standard, enable the DLNA server function in
the NAS setting.
•If you use a NAS that does not conform with the DLNA standard, play the music via a PC.
Set Windows Media Player’s media sharing function and add NAS to the selected play folder.
•If connection is restricted, set audio equipment as the connection target.
–
78
–
224
Appendix
SettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Tips
2 The HDMI control function does not work
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
The HDMI control function does not
work.
•Check that “HDMI Control” in the menu is set to “On”.
•You cannot operate devices that are not compatible with the HDMI control function. In
addition, depending on the connected device or the settings, the HDMI control function may
not work. In this case, operate the external device directly.
•Check that the HDMI control function setting is enabled on all devices connected to this unit.
•When you make connection related changes such as connecting an additional HDMI device,
the link operation settings may be initialized. Turn o this unit and devices connected via
HDMI, and turn them on again.
•The HDMI MONITOR 2 connector is not compatible with the HDMI control function. Use the
HDMI MONITOR 1 connector to connect to the TV.
163
125
125
125
37
2 When using HDMI ZONE2, the devices does not function properly
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
When using MAIN ZONE, video
output is interrupted in HDMI ZONE2.
•With the same input source selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, when you operate MAIN
ZONE, video may be interrupted in HDMI ZONE2.
–
When using HDMI ZONE2, no video
or audio is output from the TV in
ZONE2.
•Check that the power is on for ZONE2.
•Check the input source for ZONE2.
•The AUX 1-HDMI 7 connector on the front panel does not support the HDMI ZONE2 function.
•In ZONE2, playback is only possible when the input signals are HDMI signals.
•When the TV does not support the input audio format, audio is not output. Set the audio
format to “PCM” on the playback device. Alternatively, set “ZONE2 Setup” – “HDMI Audio”
in the menu to “PCM”.
•When the TV is not compatible with the resolution of the input video, no video is output. Set
the output resolution on the playback device to a resolution that is compatible with the TV.
138
138
–
–
194
–
When using HDMI ZONE2, MAIN
ZONE audio is played back as PCM.
•When the same input source is selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, the audio format is
limited according to the specifications of the TV in ZONE2.
–
225
Appendix
SettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Tips
Resetting factory settings
Perform this procedure if the display is abnormal or if operations cannot be performed.
Note that when the microprocessor is reset, all the settings are reset to their default values and setup will need to be performed again.
X
BACK
INFO
1
Turn o the power using X.
2
Press X while simultaneously pressing INFO and BACK.
3
Once the display starts flashing at intervals of about 1
second, release the two buttons.
%
•If in step 3 the display does not flash at intervals of about 1 second, start over
from step 1.
226
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
Appendix
About HDMI
HDMI is an abbreviation of High-Definition Multimedia Interface, which is
an AV digital interface that can be connected to a TV or amplifier.
With the HDMI connection, high definition video and high quality audio
formats adopted by Blu-ray disc players (Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD,
DTS-HD, DTS-HD Master Audio) can be transmitted, which is not possible
with the analog video transmission.
Furthermore, in the HDMI connection, audio and video signals can
be transmitted through a single HDMI cable, while in conventional
connections it is necessary to provide audio and video cables separately
for connection between devices.
This allows you to simplify the wiring configuration that tends to be quite
complex in a home theater system.
This unit supports the following HDMI functions.
•Deep Color
An imaging technology supported by HDMI. Unlike RGB or YCbCr, which
uses 8 bits (256 shades) per color, it can use 10 bits (1024 shades), 12
bits (4096 shades), or 16 bits (65536 shades) to produce colors in higher
definition. Both devices linked via HDMI must support Deep Color.
•“x.v.Color”
This function lets HDTVs display colors more accurately. It enables
display with natural, vivid colors.
“x.v.Color” is trademark of Sony Corporation.
•3D
This unit supports input and output of 3D (3 dimensional) video signals
of HDMI.
To play back 3D video, you need a TV and player that provide support for
the HDMI 3D function and a pair of 3D glasses.
•4K
This unit supports input and output of 4K Ultra HD (3840 x 2160 pixels)
video signals of HDMI.
•Content Type
It automatically makes settings suitable for the video output type
(content information).
•Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color
The color space defined by Adobe Systems Inc. Because it is a wider
color space than RGB, it can produce more vivid and natural images.
•sYCC601 color
Each of these color spaces defines a palette of available colors that is
larger than the traditional RGB color model.
•Auto Lip Sync
This function can automatically correct delay between the audio and
video.
Use a TV that is compatible with the Auto Lip Sync function.
•HDMI pass through
Even when the power to this unit is set to standby, signals input from
the HDMI input connector are output to a TV or other device that is
connected to the HDMI output connector.
227
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
•HDMI control
If you connect the unit and an HDMI control function compatible TV or
player with an HDMI cable and then enable the HDMI control function
setting on each device, the devices will be able to control each other.
•Power o link
This unit power o can be linked to the TV power o step.
•Audio output destination switching
From the TV, you can switch whether to output audio from the TV or
the AV amplifier.
•Volume adjustment
You can adjust this unit’s volume in the TV volume adjustment
operation.
•Input source switching
You can switch this unit input sources through linkage to TV input
switching.
When playing the player, this unit input source switches to the source
for that player.
•ARC (Audio Return Channel)
This function transmits audio signals from the TV to this unit through the
HDMI cable and plays back the audio from the TV on this unit based on
the HDMI control function.
If a TV without the ARC function is connected via HDMI connections,
video signals of the playback device connected to this unit are
transmitted to the TV, but this unit can not play back the audio from the
TV. If you want to enjoy surround audio for TV program, a separate audio
cable connection is required. In contrast, if a TV with the ARC function is
connected via HDMI connections, no audio cable connection is required.
Audio signals from the TV can be input to this unit through the HDMI
cable between this unit and the TV. This function allows you to enjoy
surround playback on this unit for the TV.
228
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
2 Supported audio formats
2-channel Linear PCM
2-channel, 32 kHz – 192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit
Multi-channel Linear PCM
7.1-channel, 32 kHz – 192kHz,
16/20/24 bit
Bitstream
Dolby Digital / DTS / Dolby TrueHD /
Dolby Digital Plus /
DTS-HD Master Audio /
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio /
DTS Express
DSD 2-channel – 5.1-channel, 2.8224 MHz
2 Supported video signals
•480i •480p •576i
•576p •720p 60/50Hz •1080i 60/50Hz
•1080p 60/50/24Hz •4K 30/25/24Hz
Copyright protection system
In order to play back digital video and audio such as BD-Video (Blu-ray
Disc) or DVD-Video via HDMI connection, both this unit and TV and the
player need to support the copyright protection system known as HDCP
(High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System). HDCP is copyright
protection technology comprised of data encryption and authentication
of the connected AV devices. This unit supports HDCP.
•If a device that does not support HDCP is connected, video and audio
are not output correctly. Read the owner’s manual of your television or
player for more information.
%
•When connecting this unit to a device that is compatible with the Deep Color, 4K,
ARC function, use a “High Speed HDMI cable” or “High Speed HDMI cable with
Ethernet”.
229
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
Video conversion function
This unit automatically converts the input video signals as shown in the diagram below before outputting them to the TV.
HDMI connector
HDMI signal HDMI signal
Component video
signal
Video signal
Video connector
HDMI-compatible TV
HDMI connector
Component video
connectors
Component video
connectors
Video connector
HDMI connectorHDMI connector
Video device
This unit
Output
Input
(IN)
Output
(MONITOR OUT)
Input
Component video
connectors
Video connector
Component video
connectors
Video connector
HDMI-incompatible
TV
Component video
signal
Video signal
%
•The main zone video conversion
function is compatible with the
following formats: NTSC, PAL,
SECAM, NTSC4.43, PAL-N, PAL-M
and PAL-60.
230
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
This unit can convert the input video signals to the resolution that is set for “Resolution” (vpage166) in the menu before outputting them to the TV.
Output signal
Input signal
HDMI
480i/576i 480p/576p 720p 1080i 1080p 1080p 24Hz 4K 30/25/24Hz
HDMI
480i/576i
P P P P P P P
480p/576p
P P P P P P
720p
P P P P P
1080i
P P P P P
1080p 24Hz
P P P
1080p
P P P
4K 30/25/24Hz
P
Component Video
480i/576i
P P P P P P P
480p/576p
P P P P P P
720p
P P P P P
1080i
P P P P P
1080p
P P P
Video 480i/576i
P P P P P P P
231
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
Playing back USB memory devices
•This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver.2) standard.
•This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using MP3 ID3-
Tag Ver.2.3 or 2.4.
•This unit is compatible with WMA META tags.
•If the image size (pixels) of an album artwork exceeds 500 × 500 (WMA/
MP3/WAV/FLAC) or 349 × 349 (MPEG-4 AAC), then music may not be
played back properly.
2 Compatible formats
Sampling frequency Bit rate Extension
WMA
(Windows
Media Audio)
z1
32/44.1/48 kHz 48 – 192 kbps .wma
MP3
(MPEG-1 Audio
Layer-3)
32/44.1/48 kHz 32 – 320 kbps .mp3
WAV
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192 kHz
– .wav
MPEG-4 AAC
z2
32/44.1/48 kHz 16 – 320 kbps
.aac/
.m4a/
.mp4
FLAC
(Free Lossless
Audio Codec)
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192 kHz
– .flac
ALAC
(Apple Lossless
Audio Codec)
z3
32/44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz – .m4a
z1 Copyright-protected files can be played on certain portable players compatible
with MTP.
z2 Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit.
Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected.
Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer
may be copyright protected, depending on the computer’s settings.
z3 Copyright [2012] [D&M Holdings. Inc.]
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”); you may not
use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of
the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
2 Maximum Number of Playable Files and Folder
The limits on the number of folders and files that can be displayed by
this unit are as follows.
Media
Item
USB memory devices
Memory capacity FAT16 : 2 GB, FAT32 : 2 TB
Number of folder directory levels
z1
8 levels
Number of folders 500
Number of files
z2
5000
z1 The limited number includes the root folder.
z2 The allowable number of files may dier according to the USB memory device
capacity and the file size.
232
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
Playing back files stored on PC or
NAS
•This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver.2) standard.
•This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using MP3 ID3-
Tag Ver.2.3 or 2.4.
•This unit is compatible with WMA META tags.
•If the image size (pixels) of an album artwork exceeds 500 × 500 (WMA/
MP3/WAV/FLAC) or 349 × 349 (MPEG-4 AAC), then music may not be
played back properly.
•A server or server software compatible with distribution in the
corresponding formats is required to play music files via a network.
2 Specifications of supported files
Sampling frequency Bit rate Extension
WMA
(Windows
Media Audio)
32/44.1/48 kHz 48 – 192 kbps .wma
MP3
(MPEG-1 Audio
Layer-3)
32/44.1/48 kHz 32 – 320 kbps .mp3
WAV
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192 kHz
– .wav
MPEG-4
AAC
z1
32/44.1/48 kHz 16 – 320 kbps
.aac/
.m4a/
.mp4
FLAC
(Free Lossless
Audio Codec)
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192 kHz
– .flac
ALAC
(Apple Lossless
Audio Codec)
z2
32/44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz – .m4a
z1 Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit.
Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected.
Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer
may be copyright protected, depending on the computer’s settings.
z2 Copyright [2012] [D&M Holdings. Inc.]
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”); you may not
use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of
the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
233
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
Playing back Internet Radio
2 Playable broadcast station specifications
Sampling frequency Bit rate Extension
WMA
(Windows
Media Audio)
32/44.1/48 kHz 48 – 192 kbps .wma
MP3
(MPEG-1 Audio
Layer-3)
32/44.1/48 kHz 32 – 320 kbps .mp3
MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 kHz 16 – 320 kbps
.aac/
.m4a/
.mp4
Personal memory plus function
This function sets the settings (input mode, sound mode, HDMI output
mode, MultEQ® XT32, Dynamic EQ, audio delay etc.) last selected for the
individual input sources.
%
•The surround parameters, tone control settings are stored for the individual sound
modes.
Last function memory
This function stores the settings which were made before going into the
standby mode.
When the power is turned back on, the settings are restored.
234
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
Sound modes and channel output
S This indicates the audio output channels or surround parameters that can be set.
D This indicates the audio output channels. The output channels depend on the settings of “Speaker Config.” (vpage182).
Sound mode (vpage112)
Channel output
Front L/R Center Surround L/R Surround back L/R Front height L/R Front wide L/R Subwoofer
DIRECT/PURE DIRECT (2-channel)
S Dz4
DIRECT/PURE DIRECT (Multi-channel)
S D D Dz1 Dz1 Dz1 D
DSD DIRECT (2-channel)
S Dz4
DSD DIRECT (Multi-channel)
S D D D
STEREO
S D
MULTI CH IN
S D D Dz1 Dz2 D
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gz S D D D D D
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx S D D D D
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g S D D D
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g A-DSX S D D Dz3 Dz3 D
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx A-DSX S D D D D Dz3 D
DTS NEO:X
S D D D D D D
Audyssey DSX®
S D D D Dz3 Dz3 D
DOLBY DIGITAL
S D D D Dz2 D
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus
S D D Dz1 Dz1 Dz1 D
DOLBY TrueHD
S D D Dz1 Dz1 Dz1 D
DTS SURROUND
S D D D Dz2 D
DTS 96/24
S D D D Dz2 D
DTS-HD
S D D Dz1 Dz1 Dz1 D
DTS Express
S D D D Dz2 D
MULTI CH STEREO
S D D D D D D
ROCK ARENA
S D D D D D D
JAZZ CLUB
S D D D D D D
MONO MOVIE
S D D D D D D
VIDEO GAME
S D D D D D D
MATRIX
S D D D D D D
VIRTUAL
S D
z1 A signal for each channel contained in an input signal is output as audio.
z2 Audio is output when the set sound mode name contains “+PLgz”.
z3 Audio is output from the speakers specified in the “Audyssey DSX®” (vpage159) settings.
z4 Audio is output when “Subwoofer Mode” (vpage186) in the menu is set to “LFE+Main”.
235
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
Sound modes and surround parameters
Sound mode (vpage112)
Surround Parameter (vpage151)
Dialog Level
(vpage150)
Subwoofer
Level
(vpage150)
Cinema EQ
(vpage151)
Loudness
Management
z5
(vpage151)
Dynamic
Compression
z6
(vpage151)
Low
Frequency
Eects
z7
(vpage152)
Delay Time
(vpage153)
Eect Level
(vpage153)
Room Size
(vpage153)
Height Gain
z8
(vpage153)
Speaker
Select
(vpage154)
DIRECT/PURE DIRECT
(2-channel)z1
Sz2 S S
DIRECT/PURE DIRECT (Multi-
channel)z1
S S S S S
DSD DIRECT (2-channel)z1 Sz2
DSD DIRECT (Multi-channel)z1 S S S
STEREO
S S S S
MULTI CH IN
S S Sz3 S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gz S S S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx S S Sz4 S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g S S Sz4 S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g A-DSX S S Sz4 S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx A-DSX S S Sz4 S S
DTS NEO:X
S S Sz4 S S S
Audyssey DSX®
S S S S S S
DOLBY DIGITAL
S S Sz3 S S S Sz9
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus
S S Sz3 S S S Sz9
DOLBY TrueHD
S S Sz3 S S S S Sz9
DTS SURROUND
S S Sz3 S S S Sz9
DTS 96/24
S S Sz3 S S Sz9
DTS-HD
S S Sz3 S S Sz9
DTS Express
S S Sz3 S S Sz9
MULTI CH STEREO
S S S S S S
ROCK ARENA
S S S S S S S S
JAZZ CLUB
S S S S S S S S
MONO MOVIE
S S S S S S S S
VIDEO GAME
S S S S S S S S
MATRIX
S S S S S S S
VIRTUAL
S S S S S
z1 – z9 : vpage237
236
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
Sound mode (vpage112)
Surround Parameter (vpage151)
Tone
z10
(vpage154)
Audyssey (vpage156)
Restorer
z13
(vpage155)
PRO LOGIC g/gx Music mode only
NEO:X mode
only
Panorama
(vpage152)
Dimension
(vpage152)
Center Width
(vpage153)
Center Gain
(vpage152)
MultEQ®
XT32
z11
(vpage156)
Dynamic EQ
z12
(vpage157)
Dynamic
Volume
z12
(vpage158)
Audyssey
DSX®
(vpage159)
DIRECT/PURE DIRECT (2-channel)z1
DIRECT/PURE DIRECT (Multi-channel)z1
DSD DIRECT (2-channel)z1
DSD DIRECT (Multi-channel)z1
STEREO
S S S S S
MULTI CH IN
S S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gz S S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx S S S S S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g S S S S S S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g A-DSX S S S S S S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx A-DSX S S S S S S S S S
DTS NEO:X
S S S S S S
Audyssey DSX®
S S S S S S
DOLBY DIGITAL
S S S S S
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus
S S S S S
DOLBY TrueHD
S S S S S
DTS SURROUND
S S S S S
DTS 96/24
S S S S S
DTS-HD
S S S S S
DTS Express
S S S S S
MULTI CH STEREO
S S S S S
ROCK ARENA
Sz14 S S S S
JAZZ CLUB
S S S S S
MONO MOVIE
S S S S S
VIDEO GAME
S S S S S
MATRIX
S S S S S
VIRTUAL
S S S S S
z1, z10 – z14 : vpage237
237
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
z1 During playback in PURE DIRECT mode, the surround parameters are the same as in DIRECT mode.
z2 Audio is output when “Subwoofer Mode” (vpage186) in the menu is set to “LFE+Main”.
z3 This setting is unavailable when the set sound mode name contains “+PLg Music” or “+NEO:X Music”.
z4 This setting is possible when the sound mode is “Cinema” mode.
z5 This item can be selected when a Dolby TrueHD signal is played.
z6 This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is played.
z7 This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal or DVD-Audio is played.
z8 This setting is available when the set sound mode name contains “+PLgz”.
z9 This setting is available when the set sound mode name contains “+Neo:X”.
z10 This item cannot be set when “Dynamic EQ” (vpage157) is set to “On”.
z11 This item cannot be set when Audyssey® Setup (Speaker Calibration) has not been performed.
z12 This item cannot be set when “MultEQ® XT32” (vpage156) is set to “O” or “Graphic EQ”.
z13 This item can be set when the input signal is analog, PCM 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz.
z14 In this sound mode, bass is +6 dB, and treble is +4 dB. (Default)
238
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes
F This indicates the default sound mode.
S This indicates the selectable sound mode.
Sound mode (vpage112)
NOTE
2-channel signal Multi-channel signal
Analog /
PCM
Dolby
Digital
(+/HD) /
DTS
(-HD)
DSD
(Super
Audio
CD)
PCM
Multi
DTS-HD
DTS
Express
DTS ES
DSCRT
6.1
DTS ES
MTRIX
6.1
DTS
DOLBY
TrueHD
DOLBY
DIGITAL
Plus
DOLBY
DIGITAL
EX
DOLBY
DIGITAL
DSD
(Super
Audio
CD)
DTS SURROUND
DTS-HD MSTR
Fz6
DTS-HD HI RES
Fz7
DTS ES DSCRT6.1
z1 F
DTS ES MTRX6.1
z1 F
DTS SURROUND
S S F
DTS 96/24
Fz8
DTS (–HD) + PLgx z1z2 S S S
DTS (–HD) + PLgz z3 S S S S S
DTS Express
F
DTS (–HD) + NEO:X
z4 S S S S S
DTS NEO:X
z5 S S
DOLBY SURROUND
DOLBY TrueHD
F
DOLBY DIGITAL+
F
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
z1 S S
DOLBY (D+) (HD) +EX
z1 S S
DOLBY DIGITAL
F F
DOLBY (D) (D+) (HD) + PLgx z1z2 S S S S
DOLBY (D) (D+) (HD) + PLgz z3 S S S S
DOLBY (D) (D+) (HD) +
NEO:X
z4 S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g/gx z5 S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gz z3 S S S
z1 – z8 : vpage240
239
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
Sound mode (vpage112)
NOTE
2-channel signal Multi-channel signal
Analog /
PCM
Dolby
Digital
(+/HD) /
DTS
(-HD)
DSD
(Super
Audio
CD)
PCM
Multi
DTS-HD
DTS
Express
DTS ES
DSCRT
6.1
DTS ES
MTRIX
6.1
DTS
DOLBY
TrueHD
DOLBY
DIGITAL
Plus
DOLBY
DIGITAL
EX
DOLBY
DIGITAL
DSD
(Super
Audio
CD)
MULTI CH IN
MULTI CH IN
F F
MULTI CH IN + DOLBY EX
z1 S S
MULTI CH IN + PLgx z1z2 S S
MULTI CH IN + PLgz z3 S S
MULTI CH IN + NEO:X
z4 S
MULTI CH IN 7.1
z1 Fz10
Audyssey
Audyssey DSX®
S S S S S S S S S S S
DOLBY PLg/gx A-DSX z5 S S S
DIRECT
DIRECT
Sz9 S S S S S S S S S S S S S
PURE DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
DSP SIMULATION
MULTI CH STEREO
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
ROCK ARENA
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
JAZZ CLUB
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
MONO MOVIE
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
VIDEO GAME
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
MATRIX
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
VIRTUAL
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
STEREO
STEREO
F S S S S S S S S S S S S S
z1 – z5, z9, z10 : vpage240
240
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
z1 This item can be selected when surround back speakers are used.
z2 The Cinema mode or Music mode can be selected. When using a single surround back speaker, the Music mode is used.
z3 This item can be selected when front height speakers are used.
z4 The Cinema mode, Music mode or Game mode can be selected. This item can be selected when using any of the Surround back, Front height or Front wide speaker.
z5 The Cinema mode, Music mode or Game mode can be selected.
z6 This item can be selected when the input signal is DTS-HD MASTER AUDIO.
z7 This item can be selected when the input signal is DTS-HD HI RESOLUTION.
z8 This item can be selected when the input signal is DTS 96/24.
z9 The default sound mode for the AirPlay playback is DIRECT. (Default)
z10 This item can be selected when the input signals contain surround back signals.
241
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
Explanation of terms
A
AirPlay
AirPlay sends (plays) contents recorded in iTunes or on an iPhone/iPod
touch/iPad to a compatible device via the network.
ALAC (Apple Lossless Audio Codec)
This is a codec for lossless audio compression method developed by
Apple Inc. This codec can be played back on iTunes, iPod or iPhone. Data
compressed to approximately 60 – 70 % can be decompressed to exactly
the same original data.
App Store
App Store is a site that sells application software for such devices as the
iPhone or iPod Touch, and is operated by Apple Inc.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ®
Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume
is decreased by taking into account human perception and room acoustics.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ® works in tandem with Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 to
provide well-balanced sound for every listener at any volume level.
Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion
(A-DSX)
Audyssey DSX® is a scalable system that adds new speakers to improve
surround sound vividness.
Starting with a 5.1 system Audyssey DSX® first adds Wide channels for
the biggest impact on envelopment. Research in human hearing has
proven that information from the Wide channels is much more critical
in the presentation of a realistic soundstage than the Back Surround
channels found in traditional 7.1 systems. Audyssey DSX® then creates a
pair of Height channels to reproduce the next most important acoustical
and perceptual cues. In addition to these new Wide and Height channels,
Audyssey DSX® applies Surround Envelopment Processing to enhance the
blend between the front and surround channels.
Audyssey Dynamic Volume®
Dynamic Volume solves the problem of large variations in volume level
between television programs, commercials, and between the soft and
loud passages of movies. Audyssey Dynamic EQ® is integrated into
Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is adjusted automatically,
the perceived bass response, tonal balance, surround impression, and
dialog clarity remain the same.
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32
MultEQ® XT32 is a room equalization solution that calibrates any audio
system so that it can achieve optimum performance for every listener in
a large listening area. Based on several room measurements, MultEQ®
XT32 calculates an equalization solution that corrects for both time and
frequency response problems in the listening area and also performs a
fully automated surround system setup.
242
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
D
DLNA
DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/or service marks of
Digital Living Network Alliance.
Some contents may not be compatible with other DLNA CERTIFIED®
products.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a multi-channel digital signal format developed by Dolby
Laboratories.
A total of 5.1-channels are played: 3 front channels (“FL”, “FR” and “C”),
2 surround channels (“SL” and “SR”) and the “LFE” channel for low
frequency eects.
Because of this, there is no crosstalk between channels and a realistic
sound field with a “three-dimensional” feeling (sense of distance,
movement and positioning) is achieved. This delivers a thrilling surround
sound experience in the home.
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX is a 6.1-channel surround format from Dolby Laboratories
that allows users to enjoy in their homes the “DOLBY DIGITAL SURROUND
EX” audio format jointly developed by Dolby Laboratories and Lucasfilm.
The 6.1-channels of sound, including surround back channel, provide
improved sound positioning and expansion of the surround sound field.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is an improved Dolby Digital signal format that is
compatible with up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound and also
improves sound quality thanks to extra data bit rate performance. It is
upwardly compatible with conventional Dolby Digital, so it oers greater
flexibility in response to the source signal and the conditions of the
playback device.
Dolby Pro Logic g
Dolby Pro Logic g is a matrix decoding technology developed by Dolby
Laboratories.
Regular music such as that on CDs is encoded into 5-channels to achieve
an excellent surround eect.
The surround channel signals are converted into stereo and full band
signals (with a frequency response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz or greater) to create
a “three-dimensional” sound image oering a rich sense of presence for
all stereo sources.
Dolby Pro Logic gx
Dolby Pro Logic gx is a further improved version of the Dolby Pro Logic g
matrix decoding technology.
Audio signals recorded in 2-channels are decoded to achieve a natural
sound with up to 7.1-channels.
There are three modes: “Music” suited for playing music, “Cinema”
suited for playing movies, and “Game” which is optimized for playing
games.
243
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
Dolby Pro Logic gz
Dolby Pro Logic gz introduces a new dimension to Home Entertainment
through the addition of a pair of front height channels. Compatible with
stereo, 5.1-channel and 7.1-channel content, Dolby Pro Logic gz provides
enhanced spaciousness, depth and dimension to movies, concert video
and video game playback while maintaining the full integrity of the source
mix.
Dolby Pro Logic gz identifies and decodes spatial cues that occur naturally
in all content, directing this information to the front height channels,
complementing the performance of left and right surround sound
speakers. Content that is encoded with Dolby Pro Logic gz height channel
information can be even more revealing, with perceptually discrete
height channel information bringing an exciting new dimension to home
entertainment.
Dolby Pro Logic gz, with front height channels is also an ideal alternative
for households that cannot support the placement of back surround
speakers of a typical 7.1-channel system but may have bookshelf space
available to support the addition of height speakers.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is a high definition audio technology developed by Dolby
Laboratories, using lossless coding technology to faithfully reproduce the
sound of the studio master.
This format provides the facility to support up to 8 audio channels with a
sampling frequency of 96 kHz/24 bit resolution and up to 6 audio channels
with a sampling frequency of 192 kHz/24 bit resolution. Dolby TrueHD is
adopted for applications that put very high importance on sound quality.
Downmix
This function converts the number of channels of surround audio to
a lower number of channels and plays back according to the system’s
configuration.
DTS
This is an abbreviation of Digital Theater System, which is a digital audio
system developed by DTS.
DTS delivers a powerful and dynamic surround sound experience, and is
found in the world’s finest movie theaters and screening rooms.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a digital audio format enabling high sound quality playback in
5.1-channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz and 24 bit quantization
on DVD-Video.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is the standard digital surround format of DTS,
Inc., compatible with a sampling frequency of 44.1 or 48 kHz and up to
5.1-channels of digital discrete surround sound.
DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1
DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format adding
a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound.
Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible
according to the decoder.
DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1
DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1 is a 6.1-channel audio format that inserts a surround
back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound through matrix
encoding. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also
possible according to the decoder.
244
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
DTS Express
DTS Express is an audio format supporting low bit rates (max. 5.1-channels,
24 to 256 kbps).
DTS-HD
This audio technology provides higher sound quality and enhanced
functionality than the conventional DTS and is adopted as an optional audio
for Blu-ray Disc. This technology supports multi-channel, high data transfer
speed, high sampling frequency, and lossless audio playback. Maximum
7.1-channels are supported in Blu-ray Disc.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an improved version of the conventional
DTS, DTS-ES and DTS 96/24 signals formats, compatible with sampling
frequencies of 96 or 48 kHz and up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound.
High data bit rate performance provides high quality sound. This format is
fully compatible with conventional products, including conventional DTS
digital surround 5.1-channel data.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is a lossless audio format created by Digital
Theater System (DTS). This format provides the facility to support
up to 8 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz/
24 bit resolution and up to 6 audio channels with a sampling frequency of
192 kHz/24 bit resolution. It is fully compatible with conventional products,
including conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.
DTS Neo:X
This matrix decoding technology uses the DTS NEO:X decoder to playback
2-channel source or 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround sources as a maximum
of 9.1-channel surround sound. There are 3 modes: “Music” suited for
playing music, “Cinema” suited for playing movies, and “Game” which is
optimized for playing games.
Dynamic range
The dierence between the maximum undistorted sound level and the
minimum discernible level above the noise emitted by the device.
245
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
F
FLAC
FLAC stands for Free lossless Audio Codec, and is a lossless free audio
file format. Lossless means that the audio is compressed without any loss
in quality.
The FLAC license is as shown below.
Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008,
2009 Josh Coalson
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
•Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
•Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
•Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
H
HDCP
When transmitting digital signals between devices, this copyright
protection technology encrypts the signals to prevent content from being
copied without authorization.
I
iTunes
iTunes is the name of the multimedia player provided by Apple Inc. It
enables management and playback of multimedia contents including
music and movies. iTunes supports many main file formats including AAC,
WAV, and MP3.
246
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
L
LFE
This is an abbreviation of Low Frequency Eect, which is an output channel
that emphasizes low frequency eect sound. Surround audio is intensified
by outputting 20 Hz to 120 Hz deep bass to the system subwoofer(s).
M
MAIN ZONE
The room where this unit is placed is called the MAIN ZONE.
Modem
Device that connects to your broadband internet provider, and is very
often supplied with the service.
A type that is integrated with a router is also often available.
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3)
This is an internationally standardized audio data compression scheme,
using the “MPEG-1” video compression standard. It compresses the data
volume to about one eleventh its original size while maintaining sound
quality equivalent to a music CD.
MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group),
MPEG-2, MPEG-4
These are the names for digital compression format standards used for the
encoding of video and audio. Video standards include “MPEG-1 Video”,
“MPEG-2 Video”, “MPEG-4 Visual”, “MPEG-4 AVC”. Audio standards
include “MPEG-1 Audio”, “MPEG-2 Audio”, “MPEG-4 AAC”.
P
Progressive (sequential scanning)
This is a scanning system of the video signal that displays 1 frame of video
as one image. Compared to the interlace system, this system provides
images with less flickering and jagged edges.
Protection circuit
This is a function to prevent damage to devices within the power supply
when an abnormality such as an overload, excess voltage occurs or over
temperature for any reason.
In this unit, the power indicator blinks and the unit enters standby mode
when an abnormality occurs.
S
Sampling frequency
Sampling involves taking a reading of a sound wave (analog signal) at
regular intervals and expressing the height of the wave at each reading in
digitized format (producing a digital signal).
The number of readings taken in one second is called the “sampling
frequency”. The larger the value, the closer the reproduced sound is to
the original.
Speaker impedance
This is an AC resistance value, indicated in Ω (Ohms). Greater power can
be obtained when this value is smaller.
247
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
V
vTuner
This is a free online content server for Internet Radio. Note that usage fees
are included in upgrade costs.
For inquiries about this service, visit the vTuner site below.
vTuner website: http://www.radiodenon.com
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of
Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of such
technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from
Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary.
W
Windows Media DRM
This is a copyright protection technology developed by Microsoft.
Content providers are using the digital rights management technology
for Windows Media contained in this device (WM-DRM) to protect
the integrity of their content (Secure Content) so that their intellectual
property, including copyright, in such content is not misappropriated.
This device uses WM-DRM software to play Secure Content (WM-DRM
Software). If the security of the WM-DRM Software in this device has been
compromised, owners of Secure Content (Secure Content Owners) may
request that Microsoft revoke the WM-DRM Software’s right to acquire
new licenses to copy, display and/or play Secure Content. Revocation does
not alter the WM-DRM Software’s ability to play unprotected content. A
list of revoked WM-DRM Software is sent to your device whenever you
download a license for Secure Content from the Internet or from a PC.
Microsoft may, in conjunction with such license, also download revocation
list onto your device on behalf of Secure Content Owners.
Windows Media Player Ver.11 or later
This is a media player distributed free of charge by Microsoft Corporation.
It can play playlists created with Ver.11 or later of Windows Media Player,
as well as WMA, DRM WMA, WAV, and other files.
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
This is audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation.
WMA data can be encoded using Windows Media® Player.
To encode WMA files, only use applications authorized by Microsoft
Corporation. If you use an unauthorized application, the file may not work
properly.
Z
ZONE2
This unit can operate in a room other than the room where this unit is
placed (MAIN ZONE) (ZONE2 playback). The room for ZONE2 playback is
called ZONE2.
ZONE3
This unit can operate in a room other than the room where this unit is
placed (MAIN ZONE) (ZONE3 playback). The room for ZONE3 playback is
called ZONE3.
248
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
Trademark information
Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories™. U.S. and
foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic
EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume®, Audyssey DSX® and Audyssey LFC™
are registered trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro
Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under a license from U.S. Patent No’s: 5,956,674;
5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535; 6,226,616; 7,212,872; 7,272,567;
7,668,723; 7,392,195; 7,930,184; 7,333,929; 7,548,853; 7,003,467 and
7,283,634. DTS, the Symbol, and DTS and the Symbol together are
registered trademarks & DTS Neo:X | 9.1 is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
©2012 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and
the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.
InstaPrevue and the InstaPrevue logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Silicon Image, Inc. in the United States and other countries.
249
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic
accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone,
respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance
with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this
accessory with iPod, or iPhone, may aect wireless performance.
AirPlay, the AirPlay logo, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod
shue and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
•Individual users are permitted to use iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod
nano, iPod shue, and iPod touch for private copy and playback of
non-copyrighted contents and contents whose copy and playback is
permitted by law. Copyright infringement is prohibited by law.
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
Adobe, the Adobe logo and Reader are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or
other countries.
250
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
2 Audio section
•Power amplifier
Rated output: Front:
125 W + 125 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz – 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)
165 W + 165 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Center:
125 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz – 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)
165 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Surround:
125 W + 125 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz – 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)
165 W + 165 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Surround back / Front height / Front wide:
125 W + 125 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz – 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)
165 W + 165 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Dynamic power: 130 W x 2-channel (8 Ω/ohms)
190 W x 2-channel (4 Ω/ohms)
Output connectors: 6 – 16 Ω/ohms
•Analog
Input sensitivity/Input impedance: 200 mV/47 kΩ/kohms
Frequency response: 10 Hz – 100 kHz — +1, –3 dB (DIRECT mode)
S/N: 102 dB (IHF–A weighted, DIRECT mode)
Distortion: 0.005 % (20 Hz – 20 kHz) (DIRECT mode)
Rated output: 1.2 V
Specifications
251
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
•Digital
D/A output: Rated output — 2 V (at 0 dB playback)
Total harmonic distortion — 0.008 % (1 kHz, at 0 dB)
S/N ratio — 102 dB
Dynamic range — 100 dB
Digital input: Format — Digital audio interface
•Phono equalizer (PHONO input — MEDIA PLAYER OUT)
Input sensitivity: 2.5 mV
RIAA deviation: ±1 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz)
S/N: 74 dB (A weighting, with 5 mV input)
Rated output: 150 mV
Distortion factor: 0.03 % (1 kHz, 3 V)
2 Video section
•Standard video connectors
Input/output level and impedance: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
Frequency response: 5 Hz – 10 MHz — 0, –3 dB
•Color component video connector
Input/output level and impedance: Y signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
P
B / CB signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
P
R / CR signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
Frequency response: 5 Hz – 60 MHz — 0, –3 dB
252
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
2 Tuner section
(ANTENNA input – MEDIA PLAYER OUT) [FM] [AM]
(Note: μV at 75 Ω/ohms, 0 dBf = 1 x 10
–15
W)
Receiving Range: 87.5 MHz – 107.9 MHz 530 kHz – 1710 kHz
Usable Sensitivity: 1.5 μV (14.8 dBf) 20 μV
S/N (IHF–A weighted):
MONO 78 dB
STEREO 68 dB
HD 85 dB 85 dB
Distortion (1 kHz):
MONO 0.1 %
STEREO 0.2 %
HD 0.02 % 0.02 %
2 General
Power supply: AC 120 V, 60 Hz
Power consumption: 670 W
Power consumption in standby mode: 0.1 W
Power consumption in CEC standby mode: 0.5 W
Power consumption in network standby mode: 2.7 W
For purposes of improvement, specifications and design are subject to change without notice.
253
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
v Numerics
3D ········································································ 226
4K ········································································· 226
v A
Accessories ······························································ 7
Add New Feature ················································· 200
Adjusting the master volume ································· 56
AirPlay ·························································· 101, 241
ALAC ···································································· 241
AM loop antenna ···················································· 48
App Store ····························································· 241
Audio settings ······················································ 150
Audyssey Dynamic EQ® ······································· 241
Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion·············· 241
Audyssey Dynamic Volume® ································ 241
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 ····································· 241
Audyssey settings ········································ 156, 174
Audyssey® Setup ·················································· 172
Auto Standby························································ 196
v B
Bi-amp ···································································· 33
v C
Cables ···································································· 24
Connection
Blu-ray Disc player (Denon Link HD) ··················· 43
FM/AM ································································ 48
Home network (LAN) ·········································· 50
iPod (USB) ··························································· 46
Power amplifier ··················································· 35
Power cord ·························································· 53
Record player ······················································ 45
REMOTE CONTROL ··········································· 52
Speaker ······························································· 28
TRIGGER OUT ····················································· 52
TV ···························································· 37, 38, 39
USB memory device ··········································· 46
Video camcorder ················································· 44
Content Type························································ 226
Convenient function menu
All Zone Stereo ·················································· 111
Picture Mode ····················································· 110
Random ····························································· 105
Remove from Favorites ····································· 107
Repeat ······························································· 105
Save to Favorites ··············································· 106
Slideshow ·························································· 108
Slideshow Interval ············································· 109
Text Search ······················································· 107
Video Select ······················································ 109
Index
v D
Deep Color ··························································· 226
Denon Link HD ······················································· 43
Display···································································· 16
DLNA···································································· 242
Dolby
Dolby Digital ·············································· 115, 242
Dolby Digital EX ········································· 115, 242
Dolby Digital Plus ······································ 115, 242
Dolby Pro Logic II ······································ 115, 242
Dolby Pro Logic IIx ···································· 115, 242
Dolby Pro Logic IIz ···································· 115, 243
Dolby TrueHD ············································ 115, 243
Downmix ······························································ 243
DTS ······································································ 243
DTS 96/24 ················································· 116, 243
DTS Digital Surround ········································· 243
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 ·································· 116, 243
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 ····································· 116, 243
DTS Express ·············································· 116, 244
DTS-HD ····················································· 116, 244
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio ························· 244
DTS-HD Master Audio ······································· 244
DTS Neo:X ················································· 116, 244
Dynamic range ····················································· 244
v E
Error messages (Audyssey® Setup) ····················· 179
254
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
v F
Firmware update ·················································· 199
FLAC ···································································· 245
Flickr ······································································· 81
FM indoor antenna ················································· 48
Front height speaker ········································ 26, 31
Front panel ····························································· 12
Front wide speaker ·········································· 26, 31
v H
HDCP ··························································· 228, 245
HDMI control················································ 125, 163
HD Radio ································································ 64
Headphones ··························································· 14
v I
Information ··························································· 197
Audio ································································· 197
Firmware ··························································· 197
Notifications ······················································ 198
Video ································································· 197
ZONE ································································· 197
Input signal ··························································· 238
Inputting characters ············································· 148
InstaPrevue ·························································· 126
iPod Browse Mode ················································ 59
iTunes ·································································· 245
v L
LFE ······································································· 246
Listening position ················································· 173
v M
MAIN ZONE ························································· 246
Menu map ···························································· 140
Audio ························································· 140, 150
General ······················································ 145, 193
Inputs ························································ 143, 168
Network ···················································· 144, 189
Setup Assistant ················································· 146
Speakers ··················································· 144, 172
Video ························································· 142, 161
Modem································································· 246
MP3······································································ 246
MPEG ··································································· 246
v N
Network settings·················································· 189
v P
Pandora® ································································· 86
Playback
ALAC ····························································· 61, 77
Blu-ray Disc player ··············································· 56
DVD player ·························································· 56
FLAC ····························································· 61, 77
Flickr ···································································· 81
HD Radio ····························································· 65
Internet Radio ······················································ 73
iPod (USB) ··························································· 57
JPEG ····························································· 61, 77
MP3 ························································· 61, 73, 77
MPEG-4 AAC ··········································· 61, 73, 77
NAS ····································································· 77
Pandora® ······························································ 86
PC ········································································ 77
SiriusXM ······························································ 92
Spotify ································································· 95
USB memory device ··········································· 61
WAV ······························································ 61, 77
WMA ······················································· 61, 73, 77
ZONE2/ZONE3 ·················································· 138
Preset codes ················································ 203, 263
Protection circuit ·················································· 246
v Q
Quick select ························································· 129
255
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
v R
Random ·························································· 60, 105
Rear panel ······························································ 18
Remote control unit ··············································· 21
Inserting the batteries ··········································· 8
Repeat ···························································· 60, 105
Resetting the microprocessor ······························ 225
v S
Sampling frequency ············································· 246
Selecting the input source ····································· 55
SiriusXM ································································· 92
Sleep timer ··························································· 128
Sound mode ········································· 112, 119, 235
Audyssey DSX® ················································· 117
DIRECT ······················································ 114, 118
Dolby ································································· 115
DTS ··································································· 116
Original ······························································ 117
PCM multi-channel ············································ 116
PURE DIRECT ··········································· 114, 118
STEREO ···························································· 118
Speaker
Connect ······························································· 28
Install ··································································· 25
Set up ································································ 172
Speaker impedance·············································· 246
Spotify ···································································· 95
Surround back speaker····································· 26, 31
v T
Tips ······································································ 210
Troubleshooting ··················································· 212
Tuner operation menu
Auto Preset Memory ··········································· 70
Direct Tune ·························································· 67
Preset Memory ··················································· 69
Preset Name ······················································· 70
Preset Skip ·························································· 71
Tune Mode ·························································· 67
Turning o the sound temporarily ·························· 56
Turning the power on ············································· 55
v V
Video conversion ·················································· 229
Video settings ······················································ 161
vTuner ···························································· 76, 247
v W
Web control·························································· 132
Windows Media DRM·········································· 247
Windows Media Player ········································ 247
WMA ···································································· 247
v Z
ZONE2/ZONE3 ······································· 16, 134, 247
256
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
License
This section describes software license used for
this unit. To maintain the correct content, the
original (English) is used.
n Boost
http://www.boost.org/
Boost Software License - Version 1.0 - August 17th,
2003
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person or organization obtaining a copy of the software
and accompanying documentation covered by this
license (the “Software”) to use, reproduce, display,
distribute, execute, and transmit the Software, and to
prepare derivative works of the Software, and to permit
third-parties to whom the Software is furnished to do
so, all subject to the following:
The copyright notices in the Software and this entire
statement, including the above license grant, this
restriction and the following disclaimer, must be
included in all copies of the Software, in whole or in
part, and all derivative works of the Software, unless
such copies or derivative works are solely in the form of
machine-executable object code generated by a source
language processor.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
OR ANYONE DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS
IN THE SOFTWARE.
n Expat
http://www.jclark.com/xml/expat.html
Expat License. Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai
Open Source Software Center Ltd
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in
the Software without restriction, including without
limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of
the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice
shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of
the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR
IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE
OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
n FastDelegate
http://www.codeproject.com/KB/cpp/FastDelegate.
aspx
THE WORK (AS DEFINED BELOW) IS PROVIDED
UNDER THE TERMS OF THIS CODE PROJECT OPEN
LICENSE (“LICENSE”). THE WORK IS PROTECTED BY
COPYRIGHT AND/OR OTHER APPLICABLE LAW. ANY
USE OF THE WORK OTHER THAN AS AUTHORIZED
UNDER THIS LICENSE OR COPYRIGHT LAW IS
PROHIBITED.
BY EXERCISING ANY RIGHTS TO THE WORK
PROVIDED HEREIN, YOU ACCEPT AND AGREE TO
BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. THE
AUTHOR GRANTS YOU THE RIGHTS CONTAINED
HEREIN IN CONSIDERATION OF YOUR ACCEPTANCE
OF SUCH TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT
AGREE TO ACCEPT AND BE BOUND BY THE TERMS
OF THIS LICENSE, YOU CANNOT MAKE ANY USE OF
THE WORK.
1. Definitions
.
a. “Articles” means, collectively, all articles written
by Author which describes how the Source Code
and Executable Files for the Work may be used by a
user.
b. “Author” means the individual or entity that oers
the Work under the terms of this License.
c. “Derivative Work” means a work based upon the
Work or upon the Work and other pre-existing
works.
d. “Executable Files” refer to the executables, binary
files, configuration and any required data files
included in the Work.
e. “Publisher” means the provider of the website,
magazine, CD-ROM, DVD or other medium from or
by which the Work is obtained by You.
f. “Source Code” refers to the collection of source
code and configuration files used to create the
Executable Files.
257
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
g. “Standard Version” refers to such a Work if it has not
been modified, or has been modified in accordance
with the consent of the Author, such consent being
in the full discretion of the Author.
h. “Work” refers to the collection of files distributed
by the Publisher, including the Source Code,
Executable Files, binaries, data files, documentation,
whitepapers and the Articles.
i. “You” is you, an individual or entity wishing to
use the Work and exercise your rights under this
License.
2. Fair Use/Fair Use Rights. Nothing in this License
is intended to reduce, limit, or restrict any rights
arising from fair use, fair dealing, first sale or other
limitations on the exclusive rights of the copyright
owner under copyright law or other applicable laws.
3. License Grant. Subject to the terms and conditions
of this License, the Author hereby grants You a
worldwide, royalty-free, non-exclusive, perpetual
(for the duration of the applicable copyright) license
to exercise the rights in the Work as stated below:
a. You may use the standard version of the Source
Code or Executable Files in Your own applications.
b. You may apply bug fixes, portability fixes and other
modifications obtained from the Public Domain or
from the Author. A Work modified in such a way
shall still be considered the standard version and
will be subject to this License.
c. You may otherwise modify Your copy of this
Work (excluding the Articles) in any way to create
a Derivative Work, provided that You insert a
prominent notice in each changed file stating how,
when and where You changed that file.
d. You may distribute the standard version of the
Executable Files and Source Code or Derivative
Work in aggregate with other (possibly commercial)
programs as part of a larger (possibly commercial)
software distribution.
e. The Articles discussing the Work published in
any form by the author may not be distributed or
republished without the Author’s consent. The
author retains copyright to any such Articles. You
may use the Executable Files and Source Code
pursuant to this License but you may not repost or
republish or otherwise distribute or make available
the Articles, without the prior written consent of
the Author.
Any subroutines or modules supplied by You and linked
into the Source Code or Executable Files this Work
shall not be considered part of this Work and will not
be subject to the terms of this License.
4. Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions
of this License, each Author hereby grants to You
a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge,
royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this
section) patent license to make, have made, use,
import, and otherwise transfer the Work.
5. Restrictions. The license granted in Section 3 above
is expressly made subject to and limited by the
following restrictions:
a. You agree not to remove any of the original
copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices
and associated disclaimers that may appear in the
Source Code or Executable Files.
b. You agree not to advertise or in any way imply that
this Work is a product of Your own.
c. The name of the Author may not be used to endorse
or promote products derived from the Work without
the prior written consent of the Author.
d. You agree not to sell, lease, or rent any part of the
Work. This does not restrict you from including
the Work or any part of the Work inside a larger
software distribution that itself is being sold. The
Work by itself, though, cannot be sold, leased or
rented.
e. You may distribute the Executable Files and Source
Code only under the terms of this License, and You
must include a copy of, or the Uniform Resource
Identifier for, this License with every copy of the
Executable Files or Source Code You distribute
and ensure that anyone receiving such Executable
Files and Source Code agrees that the terms of
this License apply to such Executable Files and/
or Source Code. You may not oer or impose any
terms on the Work that alter or restrict the terms
of this License or the recipients’ exercise of the
rights granted hereunder. You may not sublicense
the Work. You must keep intact all notices that refer
to this License and to the disclaimer of warranties.
You may not distribute the Executable Files or
Source Code with any technological measures
that control access or use of the Work in a manner
inconsistent with the terms of this License.
f. You agree not to use the Work for illegal, immoral or
improper purposes, or on pages containing illegal,
immoral or improper material. The Work is subject
to applicable export laws. You agree to comply with
all such laws and regulations that may apply to the
Work after Your receipt of the Work.
258
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
6. Representations, Warranties and Disclaimer. THIS
WORK IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, “WHERE IS” AND
“AS AVAILABLE”, WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS
OR GUARANTEES. YOU, THE USER, ASSUME
ALL RISK IN ITS USE, INCLUDING COPYRIGHT
INFRINGEMENT, PATENT INFRINGEMENT,
SUITABILITY, ETC. AUTHOR EXPRESSLY
DISCLAIMS ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES
OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY,
MERCHANTABLE QUALITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR ANY WARRANTY
OF TITLE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, OR THAT
THE WORK (OR ANY PORTION THEREOF) IS
CORRECT, USEFUL, BUG-FREE OR FREE OF
VIRUSES. YOU MUST PASS THIS DISCLAIMER
ON WHENEVER YOU DISTRIBUTE THE WORK OR
DERIVATIVE WORKS.
7. Indemnity. You agree to defend, indemnify and
hold harmless the Author and the Publisher from
and against any claims, suits, losses, damages,
liabilities, costs, and expenses (including reasonable
legal or attorneys??? fees) resulting from or relating
to any use of the Work by You.
8. Limitation on Liability. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT
REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT
WILL THE AUTHOR OR THE PUBLISHER BE
LIABLE TO YOU ON ANY LEGAL THEORY FOR
ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF THIS LICENSE OR THE USE OF THE
WORK OR OTHERWISE, EVEN IF THE AUTHOR
OR THE PUBLISHER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
9. Termination.
a. This License and the rights granted hereunder will
terminate automatically upon any breach by You
of any term of this License. Individuals or entities
who have received Derivative Works from You under
this License, however, will not have their licenses
terminated provided such individuals or entities
remain in full compliance with those licenses.
Sections 1, 2, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 and 11 will survive any
termination of this License.
b. If You bring a copyright, trademark, patent or any
other infringement claim against any contributor
over infringements You claim are made by the Work,
your License from such contributor to the Work
ends automatically.
c. Subject to the above terms and conditions, this
License is perpetual (for the duration of the
applicable copyright in the Work). Notwithstanding
the above, the Author reserves the right to release
the Work under dierent license terms or to stop
distributing the Work at any time; provided, however
that any such election will not serve to withdraw
this License (or any other license that has been, or
is required to be, granted under the terms of this
License), and this License will continue in full force
and eect unless terminated as stated above.
10. Publisher. The parties hereby confirm that the
Publisher shall not, under any circumstances,
be responsible for and shall not have any liability
in respect of the subject matter of this License.
The Publisher makes no warranty whatsoever in
connection with the Work and shall not be liable
to You or any party on any legal theory for any
damages whatsoever, including without limitation
any general, special, incidental or consequential
damages arising in connection to this license. The
Publisher reserves the right to cease making the
Work available to You at any time without notice
11. Miscellaneous
a. This License shall be governed by the laws of the
location of the head oce of the Author or if the
Author is an individual, the laws of location of the
principal place of residence of the Author.
b. If any provision of this License is invalid or
unenforceable under applicable law, it shall not
aect the validity or enforceability of the remainder
of the terms of this License, and without further
action by the parties to this License, such provision
shall be reformed to the minimum extent necessary
to make such provision valid and enforceable.
c. No term or provision of this License shall be
deemed waived and no breach consented to unless
such waiver or consent shall be in writing and
signed by the party to be charged with such waiver
or consent.
d. This License constitutes the entire agreement
between the parties with respect to the Work
licensed herein. There are no understandings,
agreements or representations with respect to the
Work not specified herein. The Author shall not be
bound by any additional provisions that may appear
in any communication from You. This License
may not be modified without the mutual written
agreement of the Author and You.
n libogg
http://www.xiph.org/ogg/
Copyright (c) 2002, Xiph.org Foundation
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with
or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
•Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
259
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
•Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
•Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
n libvorbis
http://www.xiph.org/vorbis/
Copyright (c) 2002-2004 Xiph.org Foundation
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with
or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
•Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
•Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
•Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
n Tremolo
http://wss.co.uk/pinknoise/tremolo
Copyright (C) 2002-2009 Xiph.org Foundation Changes
Copyright (C) 2009-2010 Robin Watts for Pinknoise
Productions Ltd
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with
or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
•Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
•Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
•Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
260
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
n Tremor
http://wiki.xiph.org/index.php/Tremor
Copyright (c) 2002, Xiph.org Foundation
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with
or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
•Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
•Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
•Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
n Mersenne Twister
http://www.math.sci.hiroshima-u.ac.jp/~m-mat/MT/
MT2002/CODES/mt19937ar.c
Copyright (C) 1997 - 2002, Makoto Matsumoto
and Takuji Nishimura,
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions
are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/
or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The names of its contributors may not be used
to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
261
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
n zlib
http://www.zlib.net/
zlib.h -- interface of the ‘zlib’ general purpose
compression library version 1.2.3, July 18th, 2005
Copyright (C) 1995-2004 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark
Adler
This software is provided ‘as-is’, without any express
or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be
held liable for any damages arising from the use of this
software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software
for any purpose, including commercial applications,
and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the
following restrictions:
1. The origin of this software must not be
misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote
the original software. If you use this software in
a product, an acknowledgment in the product
documentation would be appreciated but is not
required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as
such, and must not be misrepresented as being the
original software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any
source distribution.
Jean-loup Gailly [email protected], Mark Adler madler@
alumni.caltech.edu
n cURL
http://curl.haxx.se
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright (c) 1996 - 2011, Daniel Stenberg, <daniel@
haxx.se>.
All rights reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this
software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby
granted, provided that the above copyright notice and
this permission notice appear in all copies.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT
OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE
OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a
copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or
otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in
this Software without prior written authorization of the
copyright holder.
n c-ares
http://c-ares.haxx.se
Copyright 1998 by the Massachusetts Institute of
Technology.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this
software and its documentation for any purpose and
without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting documentation, and that the name of M.I.T.
not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to
distribution of the software without specific, written
prior permission. M.I.T. makes no representations
about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It
is provided “as is” without express or implied warranty.
262
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
2 License Information for the
Software Used in the Unit
About GPL (GNU-General Public License), LGPL
(GNU Lesser General Public License) License
This product uses GPL/LGPL software and software
made by other companies.
After you purchase this product, you may procure,
modify or distribute the source code of the GPL/
LGPL software that is used in the product.
Denon provides the source code based on the GPL
and LPGL licenses at the actual cost upon your
request to our customer service center. However,
note that we make no guarantees concerning the
source code. Please also understand that we do not
oer support for the contents of the source code.
263
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
List of preset codes
AVR
D
Denon 73347
To unregister the device from a button and reset to the default setting, set the AVR code “73347” to the button.
CBL/SAT group
Registrable input source button :
CBL
A
AT&T 00858
B
Bright House 01376, 01877
C
Cable & Wireless 01068
Cable One 01376, 01877
Cablevision 01376, 01877
Charter 01376, 01877
Cisco 01877, 00858, 02378
Com Hem 02015
Comcast 01376, 01877
Cox 01376, 01877
D
Daeryung 01877
F
Freebox 01976
I
Insight 01376, 01877
K
KabelBW 02174
Knology 01877
M
Mediacom 01376, 01877
Motorola 01376, 00858, 02378
N
NTL 01060, 01068
O
Ono 01068
Optus 01060
P
Pace 01376, 01877, 01060, 01068
Philips 02174
Pioneer 01877
Premiere 02174
R
RCN 01376
Rogers 01877
S
Samsung 01877, 01060, 02015, 02174
Scientific Atlanta 01877, 00858
Shaw 01376
Stofa 02015
Suddenlink 01376, 01877
T
Telewest 01068
Thomson 02174
Time Warner 01376, 01877
V
Verizon 02378
Videotron 01877
Virgin Media 01060, 01068
VTR 01376
W
WideOpenWest 01877
Z
Ziggo 02015
CBL/PVR Combination
B
Bright House 01376, 01877
C
Cable One 01376, 01877
Cablevision 01376, 01877
Charter 01376, 01877
Cisco 01877
Comcast 01376, 01877
Cox 01376, 01877
F
Freebox 01976
I
Insight 01376, 01877
K
Knology 01877
M
Mediacom 01376, 01877
Motorola 01376
P
Pace 01877
Pioneer 01877
R
Rogers 01877
264
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
S
Samsung 01877
Scientific Atlanta 01877
Shaw 01376
Suddenlink 01376, 01877
T
Time Warner 01376, 01877
V
Videotron 01877
VTR 01376
W
WideOpenWest 01877
IP TV
A
AT&T 00858
C
Cisco 00858, 02378
M
Motorola 01376, 00858, 02378
P
Philips 02174
S
Samsung 02174
Scientific Atlanta 00858
T
Thomson 02174
V
Verizon 02378
MEDIA PLAYER
A
Apple 02615
N
Netgear 03292
P
Philips 01272, 03526
R
Roku 03061
S
Sony 02713
T
Tec 03522
W
Western Digital 02558
SAT
A
Acoustic Solutions 01284
Alba 01284
Amstrad 00847, 01175
Aurora 00879
Austar 00879
Avanit 01631
B
Bell ExpressVu 00775
Black Diamond 01284
Boshmann 01631
British Sky
Broadcasting
00847, 01175
BskyB 00847, 01175
Bush 01284
C
Century 00856
CityCom 01176
Com Hem 01176, 01915
Crown 01284
CS 01631
D
Dgtec 01631
Digi Raum
Electronics
01176
Digihome 01284
DigiLogic 01284
DigiQuest 01631
DigitalBox 01631
Digiwave 01631
DirecTV 01377, 00099
Dish Network 00775
Dishpro 00775
DRE 01176
DSTV 00879
Durabrand 01284
E
Echostar 00775
Edision 01631
Energy Sistem 01631
Expressvu 00775
F
Foxtel 00879, 01176, 01356
Fuji Onkyo 01631
G
Galaxis 00879
General Satellite 01176
GOI 00775
Gold Vision 01631
Goodmans 01284
Gradiente 00856, 00099
Grundig 00847, 00879, 01284
H
Hitachi 01284
HTS 00775
Hughes Network
Systems
01377
Humax 01377, 01176, 01915
I
ID Digital 01176
ILLUSION sat 01631
Imperial 01195
Indovision 00856
Innova 00099
CBL/SAT group
Registrable input source button :
265
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
J
JVC 00775
K
KabelBW 01195, 01915
Koenig 01631
L
Lava 01631
Linsar 01284
Lodos 01284
Logik 01284
M
Matsui 01284
MegaSat 01631
Metronic 01631
Motorola 00856
Multichoice 00879
MySky 01356
N
Netsat 00099
NPG 01631
O
Onn 01284
Optus 00879, 01356
Orbitech 01195
P
Pace 00847, 01175, 01356
Pacific 01284
Panasat 00879
Panasonic 00847
Philips 00856, 00099
Proline 01284
S
SAB 01631
Samsung 01377, 01175
SatyCon 01631
Schwaiger 01631
SEG 01284
Shark 01631
SKY 00856, 00099, 00847, 01175
SKY Brazil 00856
SKY Mexico 00856
Sky+ 01175
SkyCable 01631
Skyplus 01175
Skyworth 01631
Smart 01631
Sony 00847
Strong 00879, 01284
T
Technika 01284
TechniSat 01195
Techwood 01284
Telestar 01195
Thomson 00847, 01175
Toshiba 01284
Triax 01631
Tricolor TV 01176
U
UEC 00879, 01356
V
Vestel 01284
Viasat 01195
Viva 00856
W
Wharfedale 01284
X
Xsat 00847
Z
Zehnder 01631
Zenith 00856
CBL/SAT/PVR Combination
C
Com Hem 01176
F
Foxtel 01356
H
Humax 01176
P
Pace 01356
T
TechniSat 01195
SAT/PVR Combination
A
Amstrad 01175
B
Bell ExpressVu 00775
British Sky
Broadcasting
01175
BskyB 01175
D
DirecTV 01377, 00099
Dish Network 00775
Dishpro 00775
E
Echostar 00775
Edision 01631
Expressvu 00775
F
Foxtel 01356
Fuji Onkyo 01631
H
Humax 01377, 01176
J
JVC 00775
M
MegaSat 01631
MySky 01356
O
Orbitech 01195
CBL/SAT group
Registrable input source button :
266
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
P
Pace 01175, 01356
Philips 00099
S
Samsung 01377, 01175
SKY 01175
SkyCable 01631
Skyplus 01175
Skyworth 01631
Smart 01631
T
TechniSat 01195
Telestar 01195
Thomson 01175
V
Viasat 01195
CBL/SAT group
Registrable input source button :
267
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
TV group
Registrable input source button :
TV
A
A.R. Systems 10556
Acoustic Solutions 11037
AEG 11037
Akai 10556
Akura 11037
Alba 11037
Alien 11037
Amstrad 11037
AOC 10625
Aristona 10556
ART 11037
B
Barco 10556
Basic Line 10556, 11037
Belstar 11037
Berthen 10556
Black Diamond 11037
Blue Sky 10556, 10625, 11037
Brandt 10625
Bush 10556, 11037
C
Carad 11037
Centrum 11037
Clayton 11037
CPTEC 10625
Crown 11037
D
D-Vision 10556
Daewoo 10556
Dantax 11037
Dual 11037
Durabrand 11037
E
Elbe 10556
Elfunk 11037
Emerson 11864
Excello 11037
F
Ferguson 10625, 11037
Finlux 10556
Firstline 10556, 11037
Freesat 11636
Funai 11037
G
Gaba 11037
GE 11454, 10625
GFM 11864
Goodmans 10556, 10625, 11037
Grandin 10556, 11037
Grundig 10556
H
Hanseatic 10556, 10625
Hisense 10556
Hitachi 11643, 11037, 11691
Hypson 10556, 11037
Hyundai 11037
I
Inno Hit 11037
Insignia 11423
Internal 10556
J
Jinxing 10556
JMB 10556
Jubilee 10556
JVC 11601, 11428
K
Kathrein 10556
Kendo 11037
Kennex 11037
Kioto 10556
Kneissel 10556
L
Lavis 11037
Lenco 11037
LG 11423, 10556
Lifetec 11037
Lodos 11037
Logik 11037
Luma 11037
Luxor 11037
M
Magnavox 11454
Manhattan 11037
Marantz 11454, 10556
Matsui 10556, 11037
Mediator 10556
Medion 10556, 11037
MEI 11037
Memorex 11037
Metronic 10625
Metz 11037
Micromaxx 11037
Mikomi 11037
Mitsubishi 11250, 10556, 11037, 12313
268
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
TV group
Registrable input source button :
Multitec 11037
Myryad 10556
N
Neckermann 10556
NEI 11037
Neufunk 10556
New Tech 10556
O
O.K.Line 11037
Orion 10556, 11037
Ormond 11037
Osaki 10556
Otto Versand 10556
P
Pacific 10556, 11037
Palladium 10556
Panasonic 11636, 12170
Pansonic 11636
Philips 10810, 11454, 10556
Phonola 10556
Pioneer 11457, 11636
Prinston 11037
Proline 10625, 11037
Protech 11037
ProVision 10556
Pye 10556
Q
Quelle 11037
R
Radiola 10556
Radiotone 11037
RCA 11454, 10625, 12429
Reflex 11037
Roadstar 11037
S
Saba 10625
Saivod 11037
Samsung 12051, 10556
Sanyo 11142, 11037
SBR 10556
Schneider 10556, 11037
Schoentech 11037
Seelver 11037
SEG 11037
Sharp 11423, 10818, 11407, 13101
Siera 10556
SilverCrest 11037
Sony 10810, 11167, 12778
Soundwave 11037
Standard 11037
SuperTech 10556
Sylvania 11864
T
TCL 12429
Teac 11037
Technica 11037
Technics 10556
TechniSat 10556
Technosonic 10556, 10625
Techwood 11037
Tecnimagen 10556
Telefunken 10625
Telestar 10556
Teletech 11037
Tensai 11037
Tesla 10556, 11037
Tevion 10556, 11037
Thomson 10625
Tokai 11037
Tokaido 11037
Topline 11037
Toshiba 11524, 11037, 11508, 12311, 13105
TRANS-continents 10556, 11037
Triad 10556
Triumph 10556
TVTEXT 95 10556
U
United 10556, 11037
Universum 11037
V
Vestel 11037
Victor 11428
Vizio 11758
W
Waltham 11037
Watson 11037
Weltstar 11037
Wharfedale 10556
Wilson 10556
Windsor 11037
Windy Sam 10556
Y
Yamaha 11407
Z
Zenith 11423
269
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
TV group
Registrable input source button :
TV/DVD Combination
B
Black Diamond 11037
Blue Sky 11037
Bush 11037
C
Centrum 11037
Crown 11037
D
Dual 11037
E
Elfunk 11037
Emerson 11864
F
Ferguson 11037
G
Goodmans 11037
H
Hitachi 11037
L
LG 11423
Logik 11037
Luxor 11037
M
Matsui 11037
P
Panasonic 12170
Philips 11454, 10556
S
Samsung 12051
SEG 11037
Sharp 10818
Sony 12778
Sylvania 11864
T
Technica 11037
Teletech 11037
Thomson 10625
Toshiba 11524
U
United 11037
V
Vestel 11037
W
Weltstar 11037
TV/VCR Combination
F
Ferguson 10625
G
Grundig 10556
M
Mitsubishi 10556
P
Philips 10556
R
Radiola 10556
S
Saba 10625
Schneider 10556
Sharp 10818
T
Technics 10556
Thomson 10625
271
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
BD/DVD group
Registrable input source button :
DVD
3
3D LAB 30539
A
Accurian 30675
AEG 30675
Akai 30675
Alba 30539
Aristona 30539
B
Bel Canto Design 31571
Blue Parade 30571
Brandt 30503
C
California Audio
Labs
30490
Centrum 30675
Clatronic 30675
D
Dantax 30539
Denon 30490, 31634, 33698, 32258
Disney 30675
DSE 30675
Durabrand 30675
E
Emerson 30675
EuroLine 30675
F
Finlux 30741
Funai 30675
G
GFM 30675
Go Video 30741
GoldStar 30741
GPX 30741
Grundig 30539
H
Hanseatic 30741
Hitachi 30573
I
Insignia 30675, 30741
Integra 30571, 31634, 32147
J
JVC 30539, 30503
K
Kenwood 30490
L
LG 30741
Loewe 30539, 30741
Lumatron 30741
Lunatron 30741
Luxman 30573
M
Magnavox 30539, 30503, 30675
Marantz 30539, 32414
Medion 30741
Metz 30571
Micromedia 30539, 30503
Micromega 30539
N
NAD 30741
NEC 30741
O
Onkyo 30503, 32147
P
Panasonic 30490, 31641, 30503, 32523, 32859
Philco 30675
Philips 32056, 30539, 32434, 30503, 30675
Pioneer 30571, 30142, 30631, 31571, 32442
Polk Audio 30539
Presidian 30675
Pye 30539
R
Radionette 30741
RCA 30571
REC 30490
S
Salora 30741
Samsung 30199, 30573, 30490
Schneider 30539
Semp 30503
Sharp 30675, 32250, 32479, 33313
Sherwood 30741
Silva Schneider 30741
Skantic 30539
Sony
31633, 31516, 31033, 32178, 32180,
33519
Sylvania 30675
Symphonic 30675
T
Targa 30741
Tchibo 30741
TCM 30741
Teac 30675, 30741, 30571
Technics 30490
Theta Digital 30571
Toshiba 30503, 32705
U
United 30675
Universum 30741
Urban Concepts 30503
W
Windy Sam 30573
Y
Yamaha 30490, 30539, 32298
Z
Zenith 30503, 30741
272
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
DVD-R
A
Accurian 30675
D
Denon 30490
E
Emerson 30675
F
Funai 30675
G
Go Video 30741
GPX 30741
L
LG 30741
Loewe 30741
M
Magnavox 30675
Medion 30741
P
Panasonic 30490, 32523, 32859
Pioneer 30631
S
Samsung 30490
Sharp 30675, 32479, 33313
Sony
31633, 31516, 31033, 32178, 32180,
33519
Sylvania 30675
T
Targa 30741
Z
Zenith 30741
HD-DVD
L
LG 30741
BD/DVD group
Registrable input source button :
Blu-ray Disc
D
Denon 33698, 32258
F
Funai 30675
I
Insignia 30675
Integra 32147
L
LG 30741
M
Magnavox 30675
Marantz 32414
O
Onkyo 32147
P
Panasonic 31641, 32523, 32859
Philips 32434
Pioneer 30142, 32442
S
Samsung 30199
Sharp 32250, 32479, 33313
Sony 31516, 32178, 32180, 33519
Sylvania 30675
T
Toshiba 32705
Y
Yamaha 32298
274
TipsSettingsPlaybackConnections
Contents
Front panel Display Rear panel IndexRemote
Appendix
2 Dimensions
Unit : in. (mm)
13 21/64 (338.5)
14 59/64 (379.0)
9 21/64 (236.8)
2 5/32
(54.7)
1 27/32
(47.0)
19/32
(15.0)
5 63/64 (152.0)
6 37/64 (167.0)
17 3/32 (434.0)
13 25/64 (340.0)
2 23/64
(60.0)
1 27/32
(47.0)
1 27/32
(47.0)
47/64
(18.5)
55/64
(22.0)
2 Weight : 27 lbs 2 oz (12.3 kg)
D&M Holdings Inc.
3520 10223 00AD
www.denon.com
